Appa View / The Manual D24view

User Manual: View / the Manual DV-1000 User Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 188 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DV--1000t

DirectVIEW

Manual NumberD--24VIEW--M

Rev A

If you contactusinreferencetothismanual,be sure and include the revision number.

Title:DV--1000 DirectVIEWä

ManualNumber:D--24VIEW--M

IssueDateEffective Pages Description ofChanges

Original1/94 OriginalIssue

2’nd Edition 8/95 Completerevision

RevA9/95

RevB2/96

Third

Edition

7/97 Cover/Copyright

Survey

Contents

Manual History

1-1-- 1-18

2-1-- 2-11

3-1-- 3-12

4-1-- 4-65

5-1-- 5-7

6-1-- 6-34

7-1-- 7-18

A-1-- A-3

B-1-- B-4

C-1-- C-6

Index

Completerevision

Downsizeformat

Added support forDL130,DL250,DL350,

and DL450 CPUs

RevA12/97 Contents

Manual History

1--2,1--3

2--2,2--3

4--58 -- 4--61

6--2

Revised Chapter1, Introduction entries

Added RevAchanges

Updated both pagesto newerformat

Deleted use ofdual DV-1000swithDL430

Added sixinstructionsto“MoveNumeric

Data”section ofprogram (revised thison

the example programdisk,made Rel2.1)

Reworded Note neartop ofpage

RevB5/98 Manual Revisions

2--4,2--10,4--39,4--46,

4--47,4--61,6--19

Examplesdiskette(Rel.

2.2)

Added RevBchanges

Made minorcorrectionsbeforereprinting

Revised example programs sotheywill

workwith all DirectSOFT versions

TableofContents

Chapter1:Getting Started

Introduction 1--2.........................................................................

The Purpose of thisManual1--2.........................................................

SupplementalManuals1--2.............................................................

TechnicalSupport1--2.................................................................

Chapters1--3.........................................................................

DirectVIEW1000 DataAccess Unit Overview1--3.........................................

DirectVIEWt1000 Features 1--4..........................................................

Getting Acquainted 1--4................................................................

Display1--5..........................................................................

Keypad 1--5..........................................................................

Cables1--5...........................................................................

SoftwareExampleson Disk 1--5.........................................................

DirectSOFT Support1--5..............................................................

Display and KeypadBasics 1--6..........................................................

ClearV-MemoryFirst! 1--6.............................................................

Keypad 1--6..........................................................................

Keypad ConventionsUsed inthisManual1--6............................................

CHGPRE Key(Change Preset)1--7.....................................................

MSGKey(Message)1--7..............................................................

STATKey(Status)1--7.................................................................

CURSORand +/-- Keys 1--7............................................................

OPTKey(OptionalModes)1--8.........................................................

CLEARand ENTERKeys 1--8..........................................................

Setup Parameters,theKey toDV-1000 Success!1--9.......................................

Purpose ofSetup Parameters1--9.......................................................

Programming Setup Parameters1--9....................................................

Quick TourofDV-1000 Operation 1--10.....................................................

StatusDisplayMode 1--10...............................................................

Message DisplayMode 1--11............................................................

Change PresetMode 1--12..............................................................

BitControlMode 1--13..................................................................

OperatorInterface Design Basics 1--14.....................................................

Man-Machine Interface 1--14............................................................

Monitorand Control1--15...............................................................

PurposesofMonitoring 1--15............................................................

PurposesofControl1--15...............................................................

FrequentlyAskedQuestions 1--16.........................................................

Specifications 1--18.......................................................................

Table ofContents

Chapter2:Installation Guide

Introduction 2--2.........................................................................

Step1:Choosing SingleorDualDV-1000s 2--2............................................

Dual DV-1000 Operating Characteristics 2--3.............................................

DL130,DL230 Connection 2--3.........................................................

DL240 Connection 2--3................................................................

DL250,DL350,DL430,DL440,DL450 Connection 2--3....................................

Step2:PLCSelection 2--4................................................................

Step3:Selecting aMounting Location 2--5................................................

Step4:PanelMounting 2--6..............................................................

Step5:CableSelection 2--7..............................................................

DL105,DL205,DL350,DL450 Connection 2--7...........................................

DL430,DL440 Connection 2--7.........................................................

CustomCables2--8...................................................................

Step6:Connecting theDV-1000 totheCPU2--9...........................................

Step7:Installing theExamplePrograms 2--9..............................................

Step8:Starting DirectSOFT 2--11..........................................................

Initializethe CPU2--11..................................................................

Loading an ExampleProgram2--11.......................................................

Chapter3:DV-1000 Setup Parameters

Overview3--2...........................................................................

Purpose ofSetup Parameters3--2.......................................................

Location ofSetup Parameters3--2......................................................

TypesofSetup Parameters3--2.........................................................

Howthe DV-1000 UsesSetup Parameters3--3............................................

Setup ParameterLadderRung 3--3......................................................

ParameterDefinitions 3--4................................................................

V-MemoryMaps3--6..................................................................

Entering Setup Parameters 3--7...........................................................

MethodsforEntering the Setup Parameters3--7..........................................

ParameterSetup ByLadderProgram3--7................................................

Using theLDA Instruction forPointerSetup Parameters 3--8...............................

Powerup DefaultOperationalMode 3--9...................................................

Powerup DefaultSetup Parameter3--9...................................................

Powerup Sequence 3--10................................................................

Powerup DefaultExampleProgram3--11..................................................

ChapterSummary 3--12...................................................................

SummaryofKeyPoints3--12............................................................

Table ofContents

Chapter4: MessageDisplay Mode

Overview4--2...........................................................................

Feature List4--2......................................................................

Message Priority4--2..................................................................

SystemRequirementsforExamplePrograms4--3.........................................

DL405 Requirements4--3..............................................................

DL350 Requirements4--3..............................................................

DL205 Requirements4--4..............................................................

DL105 Requirements4--4..............................................................

SystemMessages 4--5...................................................................

Selecting Message Mode 4--5...........................................................

Fault Instruction Message 4--5..........................................................

SystemErrorDisplay4--6..............................................................

Viewing Message Logs(DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 Only)4--6.................

FaultMessage Log (DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 Only)4--7....................

SystemErrorLog (DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 Only)4--8......................

UserMessages 4--9......................................................................

Setup ParametersforUserMessages 4--10.................................................

Message DataParameters4--10.........................................................

Choosing DataBlock Locations4--10.....................................................

LadderExamplefor Message Setup Parameters4--11......................................

ParameterSetup Program#1 4--11.......................................................

Displaying Numbers 4--13.................................................................

Displaying Changing Values4--14........................................................

Displaying Text4--15......................................................................

ASCII Codes4--15.....................................................................

Using LDD and OUTDInstructions 4--17....................................................

Turning DataintoMessages 4--19..........................................................

Numbering ofDisplayPositions4--19.....................................................

DisplayMaps4--19.....................................................................

HowMessage DataGetstothe Display4--20..............................................

CombinedNumeric and TextDisplays 4--21................................................

ParameterSetup Program#2 4--22.......................................................

Unmasking NumericPositions4--23......................................................

Placing Numbersand TextTogether4--24.................................................

Using theASCII Constant (ACON)Instruction 4--25.........................................

ACONExampleProgram#1 4--26........................................................

Choosing ACONBoxTextLength 4--27...................................................

ACONExampleProgram#2 4--29........................................................

Continued,nextpage

Table ofContents

Chapter4,continued

MessageDisplay Applications and Techniques 4--32........................................

MultipleMessage Displays 4--32.........................................................

DynamicText4--36.....................................................................

Blinking Text4--38......................................................................

PolaritySign forNumericOutput4--41....................................................

Embedded Time and Date(DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 Only)4--44..............

BarGraph Example,(DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 Only)4--49...................

BarGraph Example,DL240 Analog Potentiometers4--53....................................

AutomaticScrolling Display,(DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 Only)4--57.............

Embedded DecimalPoint4--62..........................................................

ChapterSummary 4--65...................................................................

SummaryofKeyPoints4--65............................................................

Chapter5:StatusDisplay Mode

Overview5--2...........................................................................

StatusDisplayFormat5--2.............................................................

Selecting Byte orWordDisplays 5--3....................................................

Selecting theAddress 5--4...............................................................

Selecting theDataType 5--5..............................................................

Using theBookmark 5--6.................................................................

ChapterSummary 5--7...................................................................

SummaryofKeyPoints5--7............................................................

Table ofContents

Chapter6:ChangePreset Mode

Overview6--2...........................................................................

“Change Preset”Defined 6--2...........................................................

How Change PresetWorks 6--2.........................................................

Title and DataFields6--3...............................................................

PresetTitleTypesAvailable 6--3........................................................

Setup ParametersforChangePreset Mode 6--4............................................

Location ofPresetVariable Lists6--4....................................................

Pointerand Block Sizes6--4............................................................

Change PresetSetup Program6--5......................................................

Establishing the Lists6--6..............................................................

Accessing ChangePresetVariables 6--8..................................................

Selecting the List toDisplay6--8........................................................

CursorPositioning OnTitle orData 6--9..................................................

Changing the PresetValue 6--9.........................................................

Pre--labeled Timerand CounterPresets 6--10...............................................

Scrolling Through Change PresetLists6--12...............................................

Using PresetsWithTimerBoxInstructions6--13............................................

Using PresetsWithCounterBoxInstructions6--13.........................................

User-titledPresets 6--14...................................................................

User-Titled TextLabels6--14.............................................................

DefaultUserTitle List6--17..............................................................

User-titled TextExample 6--19...........................................................

Individual DefaultUserTitles6--22........................................................

Combination Titles Example 6--25.........................................................

ChangePresetPassword6--28............................................................

Unlocking Access toChange Presets6--28................................................

Locking Access toChange Presets6--29..................................................

Forgot the Password? 6--29.............................................................

SpecialTopics forChangePresets 6--30...................................................

Timerand CounterPresetswithCustomTitles6--30........................................

Buffered PresetValues6--31.............................................................

Operator’sGuidetoChangePreset Mode 6--32.............................................

Selecting the List toDisplay6--32........................................................

CursorPositioning OnTitle orData 6--32..................................................

Scrolling Through Change PresetLists6--33...............................................

Changing the PresetValue 6--33.........................................................

EnteringaPassword 6--33...............................................................

Locking Access toChange Presets6--33..................................................

ChapterSummary 6--34...................................................................

SummaryofKeyPoints6--34............................................................

Table ofContents

Chapter7:BitControlMode

Overview7--2...........................................................................

Keypad Function inBitControl7--3......................................................

Accessing BitControl7--3..............................................................

Setup ParametersforBitControl7--4.....................................................

Using theKeypadToDoBitControl7--6..................................................

Selecting BitControland StatusModes7--6..............................................

Keypad BitMapping 7--7...............................................................

Exiting BitControlMode 7--8............................................................

BitControlApplications 7--9.............................................................

I/O Debug 7--9........................................................................

BitControlWithMessage DisplayMode 7--11..............................................

Multiplexed BitControl7--15.............................................................

BitControlToggleFunction 7--17.........................................................

ChapterSummary 7--18...................................................................

SummaryofKeyPoints7--18............................................................

AppendixA:Troubleshooting Guide

Troubleshooting GuideA--2..............................................................

AppendixB:Reference Data

Setup ParameterTables B--2..............................................................

ASCII TableB--4.........................................................................

AppendixC:DV-1000 Worksheets

MessageDisplay WorksheetsC--2........................................................

FaultMessagesC--2...................................................................

Message DisplayOutputMapsC--3......................................................

DisplayOutput GridsC--4...............................................................

ChangePresetWorksheetC--5............................................................

CreateTitle ListsC--5..................................................................

Timerand CounterNumbering Conversion ChartC--6......................................

Index

Getting Started

In ThisChapter....

—Introduction

—DirectVIEWä1000 Features

—DisplayandKeypadBasics

—Setup Parameters, the KeytoDV-1000 Success

—QuickTourofDV-1000 Operation

—OperatorInterface DesignBasics

—FrequentlyAskedQuestions

—Specifications

Getting Started

Introduction

DV1000

Howto

Use

Thismanualshowsthe variousfeatures

and modesof the DirectVIEW1000

(DV-1000).Yourapplication mayrequire

the use ofsome of thesemodes,orall of

them.Thismanualcan helpyou decide

whichmodesto use,and howto

configurethe CPUtosupport the

DV-1000 inthosemodes. Inthe

chapterson DV-1000 operational

modesthere are example programsto

helpyou writethe required supporting

ladderprogram.Ifyou are a newuser,

however,you mayneed torefertothe

User Manualforthe PLCyou are using.

The OP-1500 and OP-1510

Operatorpanelsmaybe

reconfigured to exchange data

withyourprogrammable

controller.

The OP-1500 and OP-1510

Operatorpanelsmaybe

reconfigured to exchange data

withyourprogrammable

controller.

The DL105 User Manual(D1-USER-M),

the DL205 User Manual

(D2--USER--M), the DL305 User

Manual(D3-USER-M;makesureyou

havethe version covering the DL350

CPU)and the DL405 User Manual

(D4--USER--M) containrelated

information,such asthe instruction set

definitionsforyourCPUtype. In

addition, the DirectSoft Quick Start

Manual(QS-DSOFT-M) mayalso be

useful.Thesemanualsare not

absolutelynecessaryto usethe

DV-1000,butmightcomein handyfor

an occasionalreference.

Werealizethateven though westriveto be the best, wemayhave arranged our

information insuchaway you cannot find whatyou arelooking for.First, check these

resourcesforhelpinlocating the information:

STableofContents-- chapterand section listing ofcontents,inthe front

of thismanual

SQuick GuidetoContents-- chaptersummarylisting on the nextpage

SAppendices -- referencematerialforkeytopics

SIndex -- alphabetical listing ofkeywords,at the end of thismanual

You can alsocheck ouronline resourcesforthe latestproductsupportinformation:

SInternet-- the address ofourWeb siteishttp://www.plcdirect.com

SBulletinBoardService (BBS)-- call (770)--844--4209

If you still need assistance,pleasecall usat800--633--0405. Ourtechnicalsupport

group isglad toworkwithyou in answering yourquestions.Theyare available

Mondaythrough Fridayfrom9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M.EasternStandardTime. If you

haveacommentorquestion aboutanyofourproducts,services,or manuals,please

fill outand returnthe ‘Suggestions’cardthatwas shipped withthismanual.

ThePurpose of

thisManual

TechnicalSupport

Getting Started

The maincontentsof thismanualare organized intothe following seven chaptersand

AppendicesA,Band C:

Getting Started

providesan overviewof the featuresand providesgeneral

specifications.The importance ofsetup parametersand what they

do areshown.“Quick TourofDV--1000 Operation”coversthe

operationalmodesand the mainfeaturesofeachmode.Alistof

FrequentlyAsked Questionsislocated nearthe end of this chapter.

Installation Guide

explainshowtoselect the CPUtype and a communications cable,

howtomount the unitinacontrolpaneland connectit toyour

CPU,and howtoinstall the example programsdisk and start

DirectSOFT to beginyourladderprogram.

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

explainsthe purpose ofsetup parameters,howtheyare used,and

givesexample programs.Specialtopics include selecting the

Powerup DefaultMode.

MessageDisplay Mode

showshowto access System Messages,including ErrorMessages

and FaultMessages.ItcoversUserMessages,and showshowto

createyourowntextand numericoutputand includes several

example programs.

StatusDisplay Mode

tellshowtoviewthe statusofCPUdatatypes(X,Y,GX,C,SP,T,

CT,S,Vand P).

ChangePreset Mode

coversthe conceptofchanging V-memorydata, the three typesof

titles you mayattachtothe valuesaslabels,and password protec-

tion (optional)forchanging presetvalues.AnOperator’sGuide

coversthe keypad procedureforchanging presets.

BitControlMode

discusseshowto enterand exitBitControlMode,and howto useit

inmachine debug applications.

Troubleshooting Guide

AppendixAprovidesalistof typicalproblems you mayencounter

along withthe mostlikely causesand solutions.

Reference Data

AppendixBprovidesthe setup parametertablesand a table

ofASCII charactersand theirhexASCII codes.

DV--1000 Worksheets

AppendixCprovidesworksheetsthatyou may copyand useto

plan yourapplication program.

unitwhichconnectsdirectlyto all DL105,DL205

and DL405 CPUs,and toDL305 modelshaving

aD3--350 CPU(itisnotcompatiblewiththe

otherDL305 CPUs). Itsmain purposeisto

provide access for monitoring and controlling

datainthe CPU,and isusuallypermanently

installed in an operatorinterface,butitcan also

be used portablyasa debugging tool.

DirectVIEW(DV-1000)

Chapters

DirectVIEW1000

DataAccess Unit

Overview

Getting Started

DirectVIEWä1000 Features

(

)

severaldifferentmodeswhich are

accessiblefromits keypad.Mostmodes

requiresomeladderlogicinthe PLCand

setup parametersinV-memory,which are

essentialforthe DV-1000 tofunction!This

manualcontainsmanyprogramexamples

to acquaintyou with all the capabilitiesof the

DV-1000,and helpyou withthe required

setup parametersand ladderprogram.

Some of the mainfeaturesand benefitsare:

DirectVIEW(DV-1000)

SWorks with all DL105,DL205 and DL405 CPUs,and DL350 CPUs

SFeaturesa 4-line by16-characterback-litdisplay

SMonitorsV-memorydatavalues

SDisplays textand numericdata generated withyourladderprogram

SCan change preset(anyV-memory)values

SDisplays CPU-generated error messages(message log)

SSinglecableconnection toCPU

SEasy snap-inmounting

SThe DV-1000 deviceisULrListed

Beforeconnecting the DV-1000 toyourPLC,we’ll firststudyitsmainfeatures.The

drawing belowshowsafrontand rearviewof the unit. The 4-line by16-character

displayisback-lit forviewing invariousambientlighting conditions.You can control

the contrastof the LCD segmentsbyadjusting a potentiometeraccessiblewith a

small screwdriverunderthe bottomof the unit. Tothe rightof the displayisakeypad

featuring ten keys.These are general-purposekeys thatallowyou toselectvarious

operating modes,selectparticulardatafor monitoring,and tochange datavalues.

The DV-1000 isdesigned tofitinto a rectangularcutoutinthe controlpanelofan

operatorinterface.Aretention clip on eachside keepsitin place afterinstallation.A

modularjack at the rearof the unitprovidesan easy connection tothe CPU.

Retention Clip

4 Line by16 CharacterBack-litDisplay

ContrastAdjustmentScrew

Keypad

FrontviewRearview

Phone Jack

styleconnector

Getting Acquainted

Getting Started

The DV-1000 display contains4linesby

16 characters,and eachcharacteris

formed bya 5 x7 LCD dotmatrix.The

unit’sinternalprocessorgeneratesan

ASCII characterset, and outputsmenu

messagesassociated withthe keypad.

7654321076543210

S T A T U S : R U N

S T E P : F O R M P A R T

M O L D T E M P . 3 2 7 F

L O T N O . 4 1 6 3

You can createyourownmessagesbyusing ladderlogicand specialsetup

parametersinV-memory.The permanentnumbersbelowthe bottomedge of the

displaylabel individualbitsofbyte orwordstatusdisplays.

along the rightside of the DV-1000.The

primary keys on the unithaveablue

colored background,and are dedicated

forchanging the operationalmodes.

The secondary keys have a gray

colored background,and are

multi-purposekeys used forcursor

movementsand incrementing or

decrementing valuesinthe display.

Displaymessages

OptionalModes

Cursor right

IncrementValue

Enter

Change Preset

MonitorStatus

CursorLeft

DecrementValue

Clear

There are basicallytwotypesofcables

thatmaybe used withthe DV-1000.The

type you will use dependsmainlyon the

PLCtype thatwill connect toyour

DV-1000.Therefore, the appropriate

cablemustbe ordered asaseparate

item.See Chapter2forspecificpart

numberinformation forthe propercable.

The chapterson individualmodes contain

several ladderprogramexamples.A

diskettecontaining the filesforthese

examplesisincluded withthismanual.

The diskettesymbol inthe margin beside

an example programindicatesitison the

diskette.See the section nearthe end of

Chapter2, titled “Installing the Example

Programs”.

a:\filename.prj

NOTE:The DL430 CPUdoesnotsupportall instructionsused inthe example

programs.

NOTE:DirectSOFT Release 2.0 programming software hasa utilitytoconfigurethe

DV-1000;however,before using thisutilityitisimportant to understand the

V-memoryrelationship between the DV-1000 and the PLC.See the DirectSOFT

UsersManual(DA-DSOFT-M) for moreinformation.

Display

Keypad

Cables

SoftwareExamples

on Disk

Getting Started

Display and KeypadBasics

This section will familiarizeyou with howto usethe keypad,along withthe display

responseforeachkey you press. Itspurposeisnot to demonstrate all of the modes

ordisplay screens.The remaining chaptersinthismanualcontainthatinformation.

NOTE:These exercisesmustbe done inasafelearning environment. DONOTuse

aCPUthatisactually controlling a process,in orderto avoid accidentally changing

V-memorydata needed bythe ladderprogram.

The following exercisesassumethe DV-1000 isonline withthe PLC,and the CPU

program,V-memory,and systemparametersareclear. If yourCPUhasrandomdata

intheselocations, then yourdisplays will likelynotmatchthe examples.

1.Connect the communications cablefromyourpersonalcomputer

communicationsport toyourPLC’sprogramming porton the CPU.

2.StartDirectSOFT on yourpersonalcomputer.

3.Selectalinkto go online withthe CPU.

4.Saveyourprogramtoaproject file,ifyou have a programnotyetsaved.

5.Verifythe CPU isin program mode.Fromthe menu bar,selectPLC, then

PLCModes, then Program.Then select“OK”,orpress Return.

6.Fromthe menu bar,selectPLC, then ClearPLCmemory,then All.Then

select“OK”,orpress Return.

7.FromPLCmenu,chooseSetup, then InitializeScratchpad.Thisensures

the DV-1000 setup parametersareinitialized tozeros.

color-coded,based on keyfunctions.The

blue keys are dedicated forchanging the

operationalmodes.The gray keys are

multi-purpose,used forcursor

movementsand incrementing or

decrementing valuesinthe display.

Displaymessages

OptionalModes

CursorRight

IncrementValue

Enter

Change Preset

MonitorStatus

CursorLeft

DecrementValue

Clear

Thismanualuses somekeypad

conventions.When keypad entriesare

required,key symbol(s)will be shown,

preceded bythe word“Press”.Example 1

asks you to press the StatusKeyfollowed

bythe Enterkey.Example 2 asks you to

press the ChangePresetkey, followed by

pressing the CursorRightKeytwice.The

graphicarrowpointstothe resulting

displaybeside orbelowthe key sequence.

PRESS

Example 2

Example 1

NOTE:When pressing multiplekeys orpressing a keyrepetitivelyin a key

sequence,pleasepause forasecond between keystrokes.Thisallowsthe DV-1000

timeto process eachkeystroke beforethe nextkeypad entryoccurs.

ClearV-memory

First!

Keypad

ConventionsUsed

inthisManual

Getting Started

Press the ChangePresetKeywhen you

need tochange V-memorydata.This

mode requires setup parametersin

V-memory.BecauseV-memoryis cleared

at thispoint, you will see the error

message tothe right, whichisnormal.

Notethe absence ofacursorinthis

display,indicating the cursorkeys are

disabled.7654321076543210

* S E T U P E R R O R *

C H E C K V A L U E I N

V 7 6 2 0 T O V 7 6 2 2

PRESS

Press the MSGkeytoviewmessages

fromthe CPU.Thismode requires setup

parametersinV-memory.However,since

V-memoryispresently cleared the display

showsavalid default“message”,

consisting ofall zeros.

7654321076543210

0000000000000000

PRESS

Press the StatusKeytoviewthe current

statusofvariousCPUmemorylocations.

Thismode doesnotrequiresetup

parametersinV-memory.The default

memorytype displayed upon entryto

MonitorStatusMode isthe Xinput type,

starting withX0.The righthalfof the

display showseightdiscrete points(one

byte)perline.The particularbinarypattern

showntothe rightisan example only.Your

specificdisplaydependson the current

statusofyoursystem.

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

=binary0,=binary1

The CursorRightand Left Keys move

the cursoron the top line,and the Plus(+)

and Minus(--) Keys scroll the display

addresses. If the displayisinStatusMode

asabove,press the CursorRightKeyto

movethe cursorovertothe adjacent“0”.

Withthe cursoroverthe address,press

the Plus(+)KeytwicetoincrementX00 to

becomeX20.

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 2 0

X 3 0

X 4 0

X 5 0

Nowpress the Minus(--) Keytwiceto

decrement the top displayline back to

X00.The Plusand Minus keys are also

used toselectdatatypes,aswell.First

press the CursorLeft keytomovethe

cursoroverthe top line “X”.Nowpress the

Plus(+)Keyonce,and the “X”sinthe

displaywill change to“Y”s.

7654321076543210

Y 0 0

Y 1 0

Y 2 0

Y 3 0

PRESS

CHGPREKey

(Change Preset)

MSGKey

(Message)

STATKey

(Status)

CURSORand

+/-- Keys

Getting Started

Press the OptionalModes keyto gain

access tothree utilitieswhich do nothave

dedicated keys.The displaywill list three

items:BitControl,Password,and Show

Err/Msg.

7654321076543210

O P T I O N

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 P A S S W O R D

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

Laterwe’ll usethe Plus(+)and Minus(--)

keys toselect the itemnumber.Nextwe

selectBitControlmode bypressing the

Enterkey.The displaybelowappears,

asking ustoconfirm ourchoice.

7654321076543210

D O Y O U W A N T B I T

CONTROL MODE?

YES:PUSH ENT KEY

NO :PUSH CLR KEY

PRESS

At the moment, wewill decline actuallyentering BitControlmode,bypressing the

Clearkey.The message “ExitBitControlMode”confirmsourchoice,and then the

displayautomaticallyreturnstoStatusDisplayMode aftera1second delay.

7654321076543210

EXIT BIT

CONTROL MODE

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

(1sec.delay)

Nowthatyou arefamiliarwiththe keypad and displayresponses,you’rereadyto

learnthe secret tosuccessful DV-1000 programming.

OPTKey

(OptionalModes)

CLEAR and

ENTER Keys

Getting Started

Setup Parameters,theKey toDV-1000 Success!

MostDV-1000 modesrequiresetup parameters.Refertothe figure below.These

areV-memorylocationsinthe CPUreserved forDV-1000 use.Theirpurposeis:

Setup parameters simplytell theDV-1000 wheretofind itsdisplay data.

Accordingly,theDV-1000 is completelylostwithoutits setup parameters!

READ

(atpowerup)

READ

(repeatedly)

V--MemorySpace

UserData

Setup Parameters

MESSAGE

DATA

LadderProgram

WRITE

Typically, the ladderprogramwritesthe setup parameterstoV-memoryon the first

CPUscan.These point tothe locationsofblocks ofdata(alsowritten bythe ladder

program),whichthe DV-1000 needsto generatemessages,presetlists,etc.By

reading setup parametersafterpowerup, the DV-1000 isabletolocate and read its

operationaldatafromthe data blocks elsewhereinV--memory.The DV-1000

re-readsthese data blocks continuouslyduring operation.

Tothe rightisatypicalprogramoutline

tosupport the DV-1000. Onthe first

scan, the firstrung places setup

parametersintheir reserved

V-memorylocations.The main

programfollows,whichmovesdatato

orfromthe data blocks referenced by

the setup parametersasrequired.

Chapter3covers setup parametersin

general.Then,eachchapteron an

operationalmode includes several

setup examplesforthatmode.

MainProgram

Setup Parameters

END

SP0

Wehighlyrecommend reading Chapter3on Setup Parametersthoroughly

before attempting to use anymodethatrequires setup parameters!

Purpose of

Setup Parameters

Programming

Setup Parameters

Getting Started

Quick TourofDV-1000 Operation

The Quick Tourisdesigned to acquaintyou withthe primarymodesof the DV-1000.

Mostof the modesrequireladderprogramsupportinthe CPU,and consequently,

somelearning on yourpart. Also,manyapplicationsdo notrequirethe programming

ofall DV-1000 modes.Therefore,itisimportant to begin byfirstidentifying the

mode(s) mostneeded foryourapplication.Werecommend all newusersread

Chapters 1,2,and 3thoroughly.Then you can choosefromChapters4through 7

the appropriatematerialforyourapplication.

StatusDisplayMode isaccessible atanytime bypressing the StatusKey.It does

notrequiresetup parameters.The 32-bitstatusdisplayisthe defaultupon entryto

StatusDisplayMode,as shown below.A64-bitstatusdisplayisalsoselectable.

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

LSBMSB

(X07) (X00)DatatypeAddress

=binary0,

=binary1

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 2 0

X 4 0

X 6 0

Inthe left displayabove, the left columnliststhe variabletype (Xinthis case).The

nextcolumnliststhe octaladdress.The top rowdisplays the statusofdiscreteinputs

X00 through X07 (or,X00 toX17 on the top rowof the right-mostdisplay).

DatatypesX,Y, GX,C,SP,T,CT,S,V,and Pare

accessiblein a circularlist, as showntothe right.

Cursorkeys letyou select the datatype for

viewing.NotethatsomeCPUsfeatureslightly

fewerdatatypes.

Thismode featuresa“bookmark”,which

recordsthe datatype and address of the

V-memorylocation being viewed when you exit

StatusDisplay.Itcan be recalled duringalater

use ofStatusDisplayMode laterwith onlyan

extrakey-stroke.

GXC

DatatypesVand Pareshown as4-digit

hexadecimalnumbers.Cursorkeys allow

you torandomlyaccess variousaddress

locations.Ifyou need tochange the data

value(s),refertothe section on Change

PresetMode.7654321076543210

V 2 1 0 0 4 D 4 1

V 2 1 0 1 4 3 4 8

V 2 1 0 2 4 9 4 E

V 2 1 0 3 4 5 2 0

StatusDisplay

Mode

(see Chapter5)

Getting Started

InMessage DisplayMode,displayoutput

can be fromone of three differentsources:

System Messages(includesFault

Messagesand Error Messages),and

User Messagesas shown.

FaultMessagesare generated byusing

the FaultMessage Boxinladderlogic.

SystemError Messagesare automatically

generated bythe CPUupon an error

event. FaultMessagesand SystemError

Messageshave displaypriorityoverUser

Messages.

User Messagesletyou create numeric

and textoutput tothe entire displayunder

ladderlogic control.OnlyUser Messages

requiresetup parameters.

FaultMesssage

ErrorMessage

7654321076543210

CONVEYOR SPEEDS

L i n e 1 = 1 2 3 f p m

L i n e 2 = 4 5 6 f p m

L i n e 3 = 7 8 9 f p m

UserMessage

* P A R T J A M , Z O N E 1

E 0 4 2 N O C P U B A T T

DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 CPUs can record up to 16 Error

Messagesand 16 FaultMessagesinseparatemessage logsas shown below. It

attachesatime/datestamptomessageswhen theyoccur.Thesemaybe viewed

individuallywiththe DV-1000.

DATETIMEFAULT MESSAGE

01 08/10/95 09:35:50 PARTJAMMED

02 08/11/95 08:00:43 BINEMPTY

03 08/11/95 07:15:53 OVERTEMP

04 08/20/95 17:22:48 LOWFLOW

05 08/30/95 17:22:24 PUMPFAULT

06 08/30/95 17:22:24 GATE STUCK

: : : :

16 08/02/95 9:22:16 SETUPINVALID

User Messagesrequireladder

programming and setup parameters.

Chapter4includes severalexample

programsdesigned toshowyou howto

add thesefeaturestoyourownmessages:

SInclude textwith numericaldata

SBlinking characters

SMultiplescreenswith paging

SSigned numbers(+/--)

STime and datestampinmessage

SCreate bargraphsforanalog data

SLong messagesthatscroll

7654321076543210

MACHINE STATUS

F a u l t = B i n E m p t y

Time =11:32:57AM

Date =07/05/95

7654321076543210

Bargraph Display

Time and DateStamp

MessageDisplay

Mode

(see Chapter4)

Getting Started

Change PresetMode presentsdatathatyou can

viewon the displayand editwiththe keypad.Setup

parametersarerequired.Titles(labels)accompany

the data,giving them meaning foryourapplication.

“Change Preset”justmeans“change V-memory

datavalue”.Password protection isalso available,

ifdesired.7654321076543210

My Title 0000

TITLE

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

Three typesof titlesare availableinChange PresetMode:

SUser--titled Presetsallowyou to

createyourowntextlabelofup to

eightcharactersinlength.

SPre-titled Timerlabels(1to 99)are

availableifyou havetimersand can

useready-made labels.

SPre-titled Counterlabels(1to 99)are

availableifyou havecountersand

can useready-made labels.

M y T i t l e 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0

C O U N T E R 1 0 0 0 0

establishlistsofpresetswithtextlabels

you create.The Change PresetMode has

built-in display scrolling capability.You

can scroll tothe variable name of the data

you want tochange,movethe cursorto

the datafield,and change the data using

the keypad.Like using thumb-wheel

switches, the datainV-memory changes

immediatelytomatchthe display.

H i A l a r m 0 0 0 0

L o A l a r m 0 0 0 0

S o a k T i m e 0 0 0 0

T e m p 1 0 0 0 0

G a l / M i n 0 0 0 0

T e m p 2 0 0 0 0

V a l u e 0 0 0 0

S e t P o i n t 0 0 0 0

Change Presetoperation isdepicted below.Setup parameterspoint tothe location

of title and datalistsinV-memory,also defining the listlength.The DV-1000 presents

these asmatched lists,sothatatitle and its corresponding data aretogetheron the

same displayline.Keypad entries can requestdatachanges,whichimmediately

updatesthe dataonthe displayand the datainV-memory.Finally, the ladderlogic

programusesthe newdatato updatethe machine controlprocess.

V--MemorySpace

UserV-memory

Setup Parameters

TITLES

DATALadderProgram

7654321076543210

My Title 0000

TITLES DATAChange data

fromkeypad

ChangePreset

Mode

(see Chapter6)

Getting Started

BitControlMode temporarilyreassignseightkeys on the keypad fordedicated

controlofeight I/O bits.A Setup Parameterisrequired.Inthe drawing below, the

setup parameterpointstoasystemI/O location foreitherX,Y,C,orGXtype I/O

points.Thisexample’s setup parameterpointsto a controlrelaylocation,controlling

the firsteightrelays.The keypad switchesoperate asmomentary,normallyopen

switches.When ladderlogicusesthese bitcontrolI/O pointsasinputs,keypad

entries can request I/O bitstoturn on aslong as keys are pressed.

V--MemorySpace

SystemI/O

UserV-memory

Setup Parameters

WRITE

READ

Whilethe keypad isinBitControlMode, the displaymaybe in either Message

Display,StatusDisplay,orChange PresetMode.

WARNING:BitControlModeisdesignedfordebug purposes only.Thereisno

automaticindication thatnormalkeypadfunctionalityhas beensuspended.

With a simple parametersetup and ladder

program,you can useBitControlMode to

turn on an outputmodule’soutputpoints.

Inthe examplesystemtothe right, the

eightkeys shownfromthe keypad have

been configured toturn on controlrelays

C0through C7.Then the mainladder

programusesthesetoturn on outputsY0

through Y7.8 pt

Output

8 pt

Input

8 pt

Input

BitControlMode

(see Chapter7)

Getting Started

OperatorInterface Design Basics

The DV-1000 providesaccess toPLCdatatothe userwhilethe CPU isrunning the

RLL program,and the process or machine isrunning. Inmostapplications, the

DV-1000 isa permanentpartof the operatorinterface.The operator’spanelshown

inthe drawing below isat the top of the controlcabinet, located at the side of the

machine.The operatorpanelcontainsall the dedicated operatorinterface devices,

such as switches,gauges,controlknobs,etc.The DV-1000 isone of these devices

whichformsthe entire operatorinterface.

Inthe transparentviewof the controlcabinet, followthe singlecablefromthe

DV--1000 tothe PLC inside.Fromthere,awiring bundleconnectsit through the rear

of the controlcabinet tosensorsand otherfield deviceslocated inside the machine.

The conveyorwhichmovesthe product through the machine mayalso be controlled

bythe PLC.

Nextwe examine the interaction and flowofinformation between all the playersin

the man-machine interface.The following diagramarrangestheminthe orderthey

communicate.

DV-1000 PLCMACHINEOPERATOR

Man-Machine

Interface

Getting Started

Action beginswiththe human operator,who wantstoknowthe machine statusor

make an adjustment tothe process.Fromthe controlpanel, the operatorcan access

datathrough the DV-1000,whichconnectstothe PLC inside the controlcabinet. In

turn, the PLCconnectstothe machine orfactoryprocess through wiring tosensors,

relays,solenoids,motors,and so on.

The DV-1000 features severaloperating modesthatmaybe used in a varietyof

ways.Butata basiclevel,itprovidestwotypesofaccessesto data:monitorand

control. Refertothe drawing below.

Monitor

ControlWrite

ReadInputs

Outputs

Monitorproductqualityorprocess performance

DV-1000 PLCMACHINE

Keypad

Display

OPERATOR

The drawing showsthe flowofinformation between the operatorand the machine or

process.

The controlpanelcommunicatesthe statusof the machine orprocess tothe

operator.Some of the kindsofinformation itconveys are:

SProduction totals

SMachine setup and process statusinformation

SQuality controlstatistics

SI/O pointstatusfortroubleshooting

UseMessageDisplay Mode(see Chapter4)forthesetypesofmessages.For

example,a diagnosticmessage thatsays “PartJam,Zone 3”givesan operatora

good idea of the nature of the problemand itslocation.UseStatusDisplay Mode

(see Chapter5)toviewthe PLC’sI/O bitstatusfortroubleshooting.

The controlpanelenablesan operatortochange the process instructionsor

setpoints.Some of the goalsaccomplished by control inputsare:

SChange a process variablesetpointduring runtime(such as

temperature)in orderto optimizethe process or machine performance

SSelecta particularproductsetup fromamenu

SPerform machine debug byturning on specific controlbitsoroutputs

SManuallyjogamachine orincrement through process stepsin orderto

tocleara partjamorfaultcondition

SControlmajor machine functions(Start, Stop,etc.)*see note below*

UseChangePreset Mode(see Chapter6)tochange process variablesorselecta

productsetup menu.UseBitControl(see Chapter7)for machine debug tasks.

NOTE:Forcontrolling major machine functions such asStart, Stop,Run,Jog,etc,

werecommend using individualdedicated controldevices,not the DV-1000 keypad.

Monitorand

Control

Purposes of

Monitoring

Purposes of

Control

Getting Started

FrequentlyAskedQuestions

NOTE:If you have generalquestionsregarding the DV-1000 and yourapplication,

pleasecheck the following listof typicalquestionswereceive.Ifyou have already

installed orprogrammed yourDV-1000 and are having difficulties,refertothe

Troubleshooting Guide inAppendixAat the end of thismanual. If you still need

assistance,pleasecall ustoll--free fortechnicalsupport.

CanIuse theDV-1000 tochangedatainthePLC?

Yes.There aretwomodesavailableforchanging PLCdata:

SChange PresetMode lets you individuallyeditV-memorylocationsasa

4-digitBCD number, fromalistofeither16 or32 datawordlocations,and

up to99timerpresetsand 99 counterpresets(depending on CPUtype).

SBitControlMode dedicates8 of the 10 keys on the keypad forsingle-bit

control.These operate aseightmomentary,normallyoff pushbuttons.

Istherepassword protection for modes thatallowtheoperatortochangePLCdata?

Yes, thereisforChange PresetMode.See Chapter6for moreonthistopic.

HowmanyDV-1000s can be connectedtothePLC?

Amaximumof twoDV-1000smaybe directly connected tothe DL240 and DL450

CPUs.See Chapter2forotheroptions,and general information on thistopic.

CanthePLCcause theDV-1000 toalways powerup ina certainmode?

Yes.The powerup defaultmode maybe selected byusing a particularentryinthe

parametersetup table.See Chapter3for moreonthistopic.

Isthereaway tocause theDV-1000 tostay inBitControlMode(oranymodethatIchoose)?

You can setup the DV-1000 to powerup in particular modes.However,if the

operatorpresses certainkeys on the keypad, thistakesthe DV-1000 outofits

originalpowerup mode.

CanthePLCcause theDV-1000 tochangemodes during normaloperation (PLCrun mode)?

No.Afterestablishing the powerup mode, furtherDV-1000 mode changesonly

occurupon keypad entry.

When does theDV-1000 readits setup parametersfromthePLC?

These areread one timejustafterpowerup,and anytime a mode change is

requested fromthe keypad.

What’sthebestway toentersetup parameters?

Werecommend imbedding the setup asa partof the ladderprogram.UsingaSP0

contacton the rung,itonlyexecuteson the firstPLCscan.See Chapter3for more on

setup parameters.

Ineedto display thephrase “TEMP1”,followed bythepresentvalueof thetemperatureinPLC

V-memory,and alsotoallowchanging thatvaluerighton thedisplay. Isthere a way to do this?

Yes.UseChange PresetMode,with user-titled labels.

Getting Started

CanIuse theDV-1000 tochangetimerorcounterpresetsinthePLC?

Yes.The Change PresetMode will letyou do this.See Chapter6for more

information on thistopic.

Canthedisplay showmoreASCII charactersthanjustlettersof the alphabet?

Yes, the DV-1000 charactersetincludes severalspecialsymbols.See AppendixB

foracompletelisting ofcharactersand symbolswiththeirASCII codes.

DoIhave toentertheASCII codes ininstruction boxes,orcanI just typeintheletters?

Actually,you maydo iteitherway.The LD/OUTand LDD/OUTD instructionsmay

placeASCII codesinthe text table,orthe ACON instruction box can convert

charactersinthe boxtoASCII codes(see Chapter4for moreonthistopic).

Ineedtoshowmorethanthedisplay’s4lines of text.CanIscroll orswap display screens?

Yes.The properladderlogicwill allowyou to do this.Examplesofmultiple display

screensand scrolling techniquesmaybe found inChapter4.

CanIuse theDV-1000 keypadtocontrolmachinefunctions, like Start,Stop,StepJog,Run,etc.?

Whiletechnicallypossible,westronglyrecommend againstthistype of

application.Major machine controlfunctionsare bestimplemented withlarger,

dedicated switches,knobs,etc.The keys on the DV-1000 areintended primarilyfor

variousmonitoring functions,orforoccasionally changing V-memoryPresetValues.

See the nextquestion and answer!

Arethereotheroperatorinterfaces availablefromPLCDirect?

Yes.Pleasecall ourTechnicalSupportLine (1--800--633--0405)forthe latest

information on otherDirectLOGICcompatible productsavailablefromusorfrom

industryaffiliates.

CanthePLCsense whentheoperator makes keypadentries?

It depends.BitControlMode isdesigned forgeneralkeydetection foreightof the ten

availablekeys,which areredefined fromtheirnormalfunction. Inthe other modes,

DV-1000 keypad activity cannotbe detected inthe PLC.

Canthedisplay indicatewhentheDV-1000 isinBitControlMode?

Yes,butwithsome qualification.The display can be inMessage DisplayMode and

the keypad inBitControlMode simultaneously(whichis selectable asa powerup

defaultmode).Ladderprogramming can detectkeypad activity,and coordinatethe

message displayto provide visualfeedback fromthe keypad entry.However, the

operatorcan leavethe Message/BitControlModesif theydesire.

CanIdisplayanumeric valueinMessageModewithaleading +/-- sign?

Yes.An exampleladderprogramthatdoesthisisinChapter4.

CanIdisplayablinking textmessageduring analarm condition?

Yes.An exampleladderprogramthatdoesthisisinChapter4.

Iplanto use theDV-1000 onlywithaDL105 orDL205.Aretherelow-costDirectSOFT

programming packages availablejust forthese models?

Yes.The PC--PGM-105 and PC--PGM--205 programming packagesare available,

each atan attractive priceforthe DL105-onlyand DL205-onlyusers.

Whatisthepurpose of thethe adjustmentscrewat thebottomof theDV-1000 housing?

Rotatethis screwto adjust the contrastof the LCD segmentson the display.

Getting Started

Specifications

CPUsSupported

DL130,DL230,DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL430,DL440,and DL450

CPUs(see Section 2,Step5for

specific communication portand

cabling information)

StatusDisplay

Displays 16 or32 pointbitstatus

forthe following datatypes

X,Y, GX,C,SP,T,CT,S

Displays numeric valuesfor

Vand Pdatatypes.

Cables and Connectors

ForDL105/DL205/DL350/DL450 --

Part#DV--1000CBL 6.6ft. (2m)

CablewithRJ12 connectors

ForDL430/DL440/DL450 -- 2

methods:Part#D4--1000CBL,

6.0ft. (1.85m) CablewithanRJ12

and a 15-pinmaleD-sub connector

(preferred),

orPart#FA-CABKIT,Usethe

Universal CableKit to attachthe

DV-1000CBLtothe CPUport

ChangePresetValues

DL130,DL230 and DL240 CPUs

up to 16 user-titled values

DL250,DL350 and all DL405

CPUsup to 32 user-titled values

Alsoincludes:

1--99 valuestitled asTIMERxx

1--99 valuestitled asCOUNTERxx

MessageDisplay

One4x16 character message

displayisavailable(message must

be inCPUprogram)

Displays textand embedded

numeric valueswhich updatewith

the application program

Displays PLCSystemError

Messagesand FaultMessage

Outputs

BitControl

Assigns8contiguouspointstothe

DV-1000 keypad

Eightkeys on the keypad operate

asmomentarynormallyopen

pushbutton switches

Bitdatatypeswhichcan be

assigned are:X,Y, GX,and C

Environmental

Operating Temperature 32 to 122 °F(0to50°C)..............

Storage Temperature--4to 158 °F(--20 to70°C)................

Humidity30 to 95%(non-condensing)...........................

EnvironmentalAirNocorrosive gases...................

Vibration MILSTD810C514.2...........................

Shock ResistanceMILSTD810C516.2...................

NoiseImmunityNEMAICS3--304.....................

RegulatoryAgency ApprovalsULrListed........

Power150 mA@5VDC.............................

obtained through PLCport

Dimensions5.12”Wx2.83”Hx1.03”D........................

130mm Wx72mm Hx26mm D

Weight5.8oz.(165.7 g).............................

Installation Guide

In ThisChapter....

—Introduction

—Step1:Choosing Single orDual DV-1000s

—Step2:PLCSelection

—Step3:SelectingaMountingLocation

—Step4:PanelMounting

—Step5:CableSelection

—Step6:Connectingthe DV-1000 tothe CPU

—Step6: Installingthe ExamplePrograms

—Step8:StartingDirectSOFT

Installation Guide

Introduction

This section guides you through the process ofinstalling the DV-1000 inyour

application.You can usethe relevantsectionsto either make a permanent

installation,orjustatemporary connection on yourdesktop fordeveloping your

application program.The installation stepsinthis section are:

SStep 1:Choosing Single orDual DV-1000s

SStep 2:PLCSelection

SStep 3:SelectaMounting Location

SStep 4:PanelMounting

SStep 5:CableSelection

SStep 6:Connecting the DV--1000 tothe CPU

SStep 7: Installing the ExamplePrograms

SStep 8:Starting DirectSOFT

Afterthe installation,you’ll be readyto begin programming and using yourDV-1000.

NOTE:. If you havetroublewhile programming orusing yourDV-1000,refertothe

Troubleshooting Guide inAppendixAof thismanual.

Step1:Choosing SingleorDualDV-1000s

DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 CPUs can support twoDV-1000 units

(DL130,DL230 and DL430 CPUs can supportonlyone DV-1000:DL130 and DL230

CPUsonlyhave one communicationsportand onlythe top communicationsporton

aDL430 maybe used toconnectaDV-1000).Connectingasecond DV-1000 tothe

CPUrequiresno additionalprogramming beyond whatisrequired forthe firstone.

Whilemostapplicationsonlyrequire one DV-1000 per machine,orperPLC,

occasionallyitisadvantageoustoaddasecond one.Refertothe drawing below.For

example,somemachineshavetwo operatorstationsthataresome distance apart.

In othercases, the machine needsonlyone controlpanel,butasecond DV-1000

placed elsewhereonthe machine couldmakeitmoreconvenient forpersonnelto

access data(such asmonitoring machine status).

DV-1000

OperatorPanel#1

DV-1000

OperatorPanel#2

Machine orProcess

MachineWith TwoOperatorPanels

FirstSecond

Installation Guide

Machine orProcess

OperatorPanel

DV-1000

MachineWithOperatorPaneland Monitoring Station

First

Second

To helpyou decide whetherdual DV--1000sareright foryourapplication,welist

some of the operating characteristics:

SBothDV-1000s sharethe samesetup parametertableinthe CPU’s

V-memory.Afterpowerup, theybothread the same parameters,and

read the same data blocks elsewhereinV-memoryfor message data,

preset titles,and so on.

SIf you selecta powerup defaultmode otherthan “PreviousMode”,both

unitswill powerup inthe mode you select(viathe setup parameter).

SThe keypadsoperateindependently,sothe DV-1000s can be placed in

differentmodesduring operation.

SIn all monitoring functions, the unitsoperateindependently. One unitcan

viewXinputpointstatuswhilethe otherviewsV-memorylocations, for

example.

SIn all controlfunctions, the unitsoperateinalogicalORfashion.Either

unitcan change a preset, and the resultisreflected at the otherunitas

well.Bitcontrolalsoworks inalogicalORfashion.

Knowing these operating characteristics,you need onlyone DV-1000 connected to

the CPUas you develop the application program.When yourprogramming is

finished,justplug inthe second DV-1000!

TheDL240 and DL450 CPUs arebestsuitedfordualDV-1000 applications,

because bothDL240 communication portsand the top and middleDL450 portsmay

connectdirectlytoDV-1000s.Besuretoconfigure both portsforK-sequence

protocol.

TheDL250,DL350 and DL440 CPUscan connect totwoDV-1000s,butnotas

simplyasaDL240 orDL450.The variousmethodsare asfollows:

SByadding DataCommunication Modules(DCM),you can connect

additional DV-1000s.

SAsecond DV--1000 maybe connected directlytothe CPU,byusing the

bottomcommunication portand adding an external+5Vsupply(since

the bottomportdoesnotsupply+5V).Usethe cable diagramslaterin

this chapterforconnectorpin-outinformation.

SADL405 SmartSlice productcan connect to one DV-1000 (appliesto

DL405 productsonly).

DualDV-1000

Operating

Characteristics

DL240,DL450

Connection

DL440,

Connection

Installation Guide

Step2:PLCSelection

The DV-1000 works with all DL105,DL205 and DL405 seriesCPUs,in addition to

DL350 CPUs.At thispointyou mayalready know whichPLCfamilyand type best fits

yourapplication.However,differencesinthe availabilityof featuresexist thatyou

maywant tofactorintoyourdecision.The table belowoutlinesthe feature

differences.

DV-1000 FEATURES DL105

DL230

DL240 DL250,DL350,

DL430,DL440,

DL450

SelectablePower-up Mode YesYesYes

Textand NumericMessagesYesYesYes

StatusAvailable ofV-MemoryDataTypes:X,Y,C,

SP,T,CT,

S,V,P

X,Y,C,

SP,T,CT,

S,V,P

X,Y,GX,C,SP,

T,CT,S,V,P

Change PresetLocations16 16 32

Change PresetPasswordYesYesYes

Titled TimerPresetValues,Number

Available

16 99 99

Titled CounterPresetValues,Number

Available

16 99 99

BitControlYesYesYes

NumberofDV-1000sConnectableDirectly

toCPU

1 2 1 (2forDL450)

Alsoconsiderthe availabilityofcertainfeaturesin eachCPUtype thatsupports

programming forthe DV-1000,given inthe following table.

CPUFeatures ThatSupport

DV-1000 Programming

DL130

DL230

DL430 DL240,DL250,DL350,

DL440,DL450

ACONInstruction (ASCII Const.)YesNoYes

MOVMCInstruction YesNoYes

Can ConnectCPUsimultaneously

toDV-1000 and DirectSOFT

NoYesYes

Overall, the DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 orDL450 CPUsarethe bestchoicesfor

DV-1000 applications.The maininconveniencewiththe DL430 isitslack ofACON

and MOVMC instructionsthathelpinMessage DisplayMode.Use of the DL130 or

DL230 requires switching its singlecommunicationsportbetween the DV-1000 and

DirectSOFT programming whileyou are developing the ladderprogram.

Installation Guide

Step3:Selecting aMounting Location

Before actuallyinstalling the DV-1000 inyourapplication,werecommend doing a

sketch of the controlpaneloroperatorinterface,orwhereverthe DV-1000 will be

installed. One goal in doing this sketchisto determine the length ofcable needed to

connect the DV-1000 tothe PLC.The sketch needstoshowthe DV-1000 and the

PLCtowhichitconnects.Trytoinclude the following details:

SOperatorPanel location on machine orfactoryfloor

SOperatorPanel layout, including DV-1000 mounting location(s)

SControl Cabinetlayout, including PLCmounting location

SElectricalcableconnecting DV-1000 toPLC(showing cablelength)

Machine orProcess

PLC

ExampleApplication Sketch(Top View)

IndustrialLathe

DV-1000 Control Cabinet

Electrical

Cable

OperatorPanel

If yourapplication requirestwoDV-1000sinthe operatorinterface,include them

bothinthe sketch. If possible,do Step 3 beforefinalizing yourapplication layout.

Thisplanning mayeliminatethe need tomake a customcableinthe eventstandard

cablesaretoo short foryourinitial layout.

Installation Guide

Step4:PanelMounting

The DV-1000 isdesigned to easily snap intoarectangularcutoutin a controlpanelor

othersurface panelat the machine. On eachside of the housing thereisaretention

cliptokeep the unitin place afterinstallation.The drawing belowgivesthe physical

dimensionsof the DV-1000 housing.

(125mm)

4.92 ”(34mm)

1.34 ”

(26mm)

1.03 ”

(67mm)

2.64 ”

Back Side

(130mm

5.12 ”

The panelcut-outdimensionsareshowntothe

right. This sizerectanglewill provide

necessary clearanceforthe bodyof the unit,

butwill allowthe outerhousing bezeltocover

the edgesof the cut-out fora nicefinished

appearance.The optimumpanelthickness for

using the retention clipsis1/16”to 1/8”.

(125.5mm

4.94 ”

(67.3mm)

2.65 ”PanelCut-out

Dimensions

When yourpanelcut-outisfinished,you’rereadytomount the DV-1000 inthe

controlpanel.Simplypushitinfromthe front, and itwill snap into place. If you need to

removethe DV-1000,justpress the retention clipsinwardwhile pushing the unit from

the reartowardthe panel’sfrontside,and itshouldjustslip out.

NOTE:If possible,avoidmounting othercontrolpaneldevicesdirectlyunderthe

DV-1000.Doing somayinterferewith access tothe brightness adjustmentscrew.

Installation Guide

Step5:CableSelection

Inthis step weselect the appropriatecabletoconnect the DV-1000 toyourCPU.

Cables comeintwoversions,which differinthe connectortype atone end. One

version isforconnection to all DL105,DL205 and DL350 CPUs.The otherisfor

DL430 and DL440 CPUs.DL450 CPUs can use eitherversion.

The DV-1000 connectstothe single phone-jack-stylecommunicationsporton a

DL130 orDL230, the top porton a DL250,DL350,orDL450,orto eitherporton a

DL240.The standardcable and itspartnumberarelisted inthe following figure.

6.6ft/2m

Phone Jack style

connector (RJ12),

6-conductor

UsePartNo.DV-1000CBL

The DV-1000 connectstothe 15-pintop porton DL430 and DL440 CPUsand the

middle porton DL450 CPUs.The bottomporton theseCPUsdo notprovide the

needed +5V.There aretwomethodsfor making theseconnections,shown below.

Method 1(preferred):UsePartNo.D4-1000CBL

6.0ft/1.85m

Phone Jack style

connector (RJ12)

15-pinD-sub

connector (male)

Universal15 pin

D--sub connector

Std phone jack

Method 2:UsePartNo.FA-CABKIT

7.0ft/2.15m

Phone jack style

connector (RJ12)

Connectsto

DV-1000

Connectsto

CPU

Shielded Cable

Non-shielded Cable

Connects

toDV-1000

Connectsto

CPU

NOTE:The DV-1000 usesKsequence protocoltocommunicatetothe PLC.Some

TI435âCPUs couldreliably connect to onlyone device atatime using Ksequence

protocol.Ksequence protocol isavailable on all portson DL105,DL205,DL405 and

DL350 CPUs.

DL105,DL205

DL350,DL450

Phone Jack Style

Connection

DL430,DL440,

DL450 15-Pin

Connection

Installation Guide

The firstmethod (the preferred method)usesaspecialshielded cablewith a

modularphone-jack-styleconnectoron one end and a 15-pinD-shell connectoron

the other.The connectorsplug directlyintothe DV-1000 and CPUport.

The second method usesa non-shielded cable and an adapterplug fromthe cable

kit. The cable(same asDL105,DL205,DL350,DL450 cable)hasamodular

phone-jack-styleconnectoratboth ends,so eitherend will connect tothe DV-1000.

The otherend connectsto an adaptertogofroma 6-conductor modularto a

15-conductorD-shell toconnect tothe CPUport.

Insome applicationsthe length of the standardPLCDirectcablemaynotbe quite

long enough.You maymakeyourowncable,butobservethe following guidelines:

SUseashielded type cable.Besuretoconnectits shield atboth endsto

the appropriateconnectorpins.

SDo notexceed 15 feetinlength.

NOTE:The standardcablesare approximately6feetlong.Ifyou have determined

the need foracablelongerthan 6 feet, you mayuse a slightlylongerone (up to 15

feet).The noiseimmunityof the DV-1000 communicationsmaydecreasewith

cableslongerthan 15 feet.

Shield

RJ12

15 PinD-shell

Shield

RJ12RJ12

DL105,DL205,DL350,

DL450 Connection

DL430,DL440,DL450 Connectio

RJ12 ConnectorPin-out

PinInformation

5+5VDC

Common

+5VDC

CustomCables

Installation Guide

Step6:Connecting theDV-1000 totheCPU

Inthe first fivestepswe haveselected the numberofDV-1000s,PLCtype,decided

wheretomount the PLCand DV-1000,and selected the propercabletoconnect

them.Now we’rereadytoconnect the DV-1000 tothe CPU.Afterdoing so, turn on

the PLCbyapplying electricalpower. If properly connected, the DV-1000 will turn on

wheneverthe PLC ison (the CPU“PWR”LED isilluminated).The back-lightis

always on wheneverthe DV-1000 ispowered.

Afterthe DV-1000 ispowered,you can

adjust the display contrast. An adjustment

screw isaccessible at the bottomof the

unit through a small hole.Use a small

Philips screwdriverto adjust the contrast

forambientlighting conditionsand desired

viewing angle.

ContrastAdjustmentScrew

(on bottomofunit)

In almostall cases, the DV-1000 displaywill showsomemessage at firstpowerup.

The exactmessage on the displaydependsmostlyon the currentCPUmode,but

alsothe contentsofCPUprogram memoryand variablememory.

Step7:Installing theExamplePrograms

Adiskette ofexample programsis

included withthismanual.All of the

example programsinthe manualare on

the diskette. One of the bestways tolearn

the DV-1000 istoload and run these

programs. It ispossibletoload the

examplesfromthe diskette.However,we

recommend copying themtothe hard

driveinyourcomputer,and keep the

originaldisketteinasafe place.

a:\filename.prj

Toinstall the example programsifusing Windows 3.1, followthesesteps:

1.Make a newdirectoryon the hard driveinyourcomputer.Forexample,

if the hard driveisdriveC, type:

MD C:\DV--1000

2.Copyall the filesfromthe example programdisk tothe newdirectory.For

example,if the disketteisin driveA:and the hard driveisdriveC:, type:

COPY A:\*.*C:\DV--1000\*.*

Installation Guide

Toinstall the example programsifusing WIN95, followthesesteps:

1.Select the Explorericon and open. If the hard driveisdriveC,select the

(C:) icon.

2.Make a newdirectoryinthe hard drive ofyourcomputer.Forexample,

Select the Filemenu, then selectNewand then Folder.Noticethe New

Foldericon thatappears.Select the folderand nameit“DV-1000”by

selecting the Filemenu and selecting Rename.Type inthe newname.

3.Copyall the contentsof the example programdisk. Insert the diskettein

driveA,and selectand open the 3 1/2Floppy(A)icon.Noticethe disk

containstwo directoriesand one text file:“130_230”,“240_450”,and

“Readme.txt”.Selectall three byopening the Editmenu and selecting

SelectAll. Open the Editmenu again and selectCopy.

4.Pastethe programdisk contentsintothe new C drive“DV-1000”directory.

Open the “DV-1000”directory,open the Editmenu and selectPaste.

Afterthesesteps,you’rereadytostartDirectSOFT and run the example programs.

Open the READMEfileinthe examplesdirectoryforinstructionson whichsetof

examplesto usewithyourPLC.Usethe examplesinthe 105 directoryifusing any

DL105 MicroPLC.Usethe examplesinthe 230 directoryifusing a DL205 with a

D2--230 CPU.Usethe 240_250 examplesifusing a DL205 with a D2--240 or

D2--250 CPU.Usethe 350_405 examplesifusingaDL305 withaD2--350 CPUor

anyDL405 CPU.

Installation Guide

Step8:Starting DirectSOFT

The DV-1000 relieson the ladderprogramand setup parametersinV-memoryfor

much ofitsoperation.Beforewe beginthe seriesofexamplesand lessonsinthe

following chapters,itisimportant to getyourCPU inaknownstarting state. Onlythen

will the examplesinthe following chaptersinthismanual workor makesensetoyou.

The starting condition of the PLCthatwe need iswith program memory cleared,and

V-memory cleared.The following stepswill guide you through thisprocess.

1.Connect the communications cablefromyourpersonalcomputer

communicationsport toyourPLC’sprogramming porton the CPU.

2.StartDirectSOFT on yourpersonalcomputer.

3.Selectalinkto go online withthe CPU.

4.Savethe project fileto disk at thistime,ifyou created a programinthe PLC

thathasnotbeen saved to disk.

5.Verifythe CPU isin program mode.Fromthe menu bar,selectPLC, then

PLCModes, then Program.Then select“OK”,orpress Return.

6.Fromthe menu bar,selectPLC, then ClearPLCmemory,then All.Then

select“OK”,orpress Return.

7.FromPLCmenu,chooseSetup, then InitializeScratchpad.Thisensures

the DV-1000 setup parametersareinitialized tozerovalues.

NOTE:If you are usingaDL130 orDL230 CPU,you probablynoticed bynowthatit

hasonlyone communicationsport. Therefore,you will havetoswap

communications cablesinthatportin orderto alternatelyuseDirectSOFT and the

DV-1000 withthe CPU.UsingaDL240 CPU which hastwo portswill alleviatethis

inconvenience.

Toload an example programfromthe DV-1000 directoryon the hard drive,do the

following:

1.Select the Files menu, then OpenProject.

2.Adialog boxwill appear.Select the disk and directorywherethe example

programsreside (forexample,driveC:, directory\DV-1000).

3.Select the file name of the programyou wishtoload, then OK.When the

programhasloaded,itsladder rungswill appearon the monitorscreen.

4.Select the PLCmenu, then Connect, then select the linkto use.All the

programexamplesaresaved withoutPLC linkinformation,soyou haveto

re-connect toyourparticularCPU. If amessage appearswhich asks you to

select the source ofprogramtoview,selectDisk.

5.Ensurethe CPU isinProgram mode.Then download the programtothe

CPU.Select the Filemenu,WriteProgram..., then selectTo PLC.

6.When the programhasdownloaded,put the CPU inRun Mode.Select the

PLCmenu,PLCModes..., then selectRun.

7.Then followthe directionswiththe example programfromthismanual.

Usually you will haveto usethe keypad to get the DV-1000 in a particular

mode tosee the programoperate.

InitializetheCPU

Loading an

ExampleProgram

DV-1000 Setup

Parameters

In ThisChapter....

—Overview

—ParameterDefinitions

—Entering Setup Parameters

—Usingthe LDAInstruction forPointerSetup Parameters

—PowerupDefault OperationalMode

—ChapterSummary

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

Overview

Some of the operationalmodesof the DV-1000 have user-selectablefeatureswhich

requiresome userprogramming beforethosemodesmaybe used. Inthe Display

and Keypad Basics exercise ofChapter1wesawsome“Setup Error” messages

occur.Thesewere normalbecausetherewere no setup parametersentered forthe

mode requested byourkeypad entry.The goalof this chapteristo define the setup

parameter requirementsforall DV-1000 modes,and then showhoweasy itisto

programthese parameters.

All setup parametersresideintheCPU’sV-memory space,notintheDV-1000.

Thisisthe most fundamentalconceptin understanding setup parameters.The

DV-1000 hasno user memoryofitsown. Instead,a block ofV-memorylocationsis

reserved inthe CPUspecificallyforthesesetup parameters.

parametersfromthe CPU’sV-memory.

Refertothe image ofV-memorytothe

right. The memorymap startsat the top at

V0000,and itswidthisone dataword.

Setup parametersoccupyV-memory

locationsfromV7620 toV7627 on all

CPUs,and fromV7720 toV7722 on all

CPUsexceptDL130 and DL230 CPUs,

which uselocationsV7640 toV7642.

Although theyaretechnically separated

intotwo blocks, thismanualsimplifiesthe

discussion by combining theseinto one

block.All subsequentdrawingsof this

memorymap show DV-1000 setup

parametersasone data block.

V7620 to

V7627

V7720 to

V7722*

V0000

V--MemorySpace

Setup Parameters

Parameters cont’d

End ofV--

Memory

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuselocations

V7640 toV7642 instead ofV7720 toV7722.

The individualdatawordcontentsofsetup

parametersbelong to one of three typesof

functions:

SPointers-- simplypoint tothe starting

V-memoryaddress ofanotherdata

block inthe UserData portion of

V-memorythatcontainsinformation

usefultothe DV-1000.

SBlock sizes --tellshowmany

V--memorylocations(datawords)are

inthe block referenced bythe

associated pointer.

SData-- constantswhichthe DV-1000

readsforconfiguration purposes.

V0000

V--MemorySpace

Data

End ofV--

Memory

UserData

Pointer=xxxx

Block Size=y

Vxxxx

Setup Parameters

DV-1000 Data

Purpose ofSetup

Parameters

Location ofSetup

Parameters

Types ofSetup

Parameters

DV-1000 Setup Parameters

Asan example,let’slookathowthe DV-1000 uses setup parametersto display

messages.Atpowerup, the ladderprogramwritesthe setup parameters.The

DV-1000 usesthe pointersand block sizestofind the message dataforexample,as

shown below.During operation, the DV-1000 readsthe message datarepeatedly,

and interpretsit tocreate an outputon the display.

READ

(atpowerup)

READ

(repeatedly)

V--MemorySpace

UserData

Setup Parameters

MESSAGE

DATA

LadderProgram

WRITE

The DV-1000 appliesthe same basicprocedureto all modeswhichrequiresetup

parameters:

SRead the setup parametersatpowerup.

SRead orwritethe associated dataforeachmode during normal

operation.

DV-1000 requiresetup parameters.

You’ll firstneed to decide whichmodes

arerequired inyourapplication.You

can even develop and test the ladder

programforeachmode separately.

However,all the setup parameter

instructionsmaybe combined into a

singlerung,as showntothe right.

Afterthe setup parameter rung, the

main programbegins.

SP0

Setup Parameters:

MessageDisplay

ChangePreset

BitControl

HowtheDV-1000

Uses Setup

Parameters

Setup Parameter

LadderRung

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

ParameterDefinitions

The setup parameters consistofatotalofeleven V-memorylocations.Together,

they containseveralpointers,block sizes,and data.The following tableshowsthe

setup parametersasone group.Following the description ofeach parameter, the

DV-1000 mode which usesthatparameterislisted.The remaining column

referencesotherchaptersfor moreinformation on howto usespecific setup

parameters.Thistable appliesto all CPUs.

PLC CPU

V-memory

Locations

DV-1000 ParameterDescription Operational

Mode

See Chapter

Number

V7620 Change PresetValuesPointerCHGPRE6

V7621 Change PresetTitlesPointerCHGPRE6

V7622 Change PresetBlock SizeCHGPRE6

V7623 NumericMessage PointerMSG4

V7624 TextMessagesPointerMSG4

V7625 BitControlPointerBITCNTRL 7

V7626 Powerup OperationalMode Power-up

Default

V7627 Change PresetValue PasswordCHGPRE6

V7720*Titled TimerPresetValue PointerCHGPRE6

V7721*Titled CounterPresetValue PointerCHGPRE6

V7722*,

High byte

Titled TimerPresetBlock SizeCHGPRE6

LowbyteTitled CounterPresetBlock SizeCHGPRE6

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722.

The tableonthe following page givesfurtherdetailsabout the setup parameters.

Following each parameterdescription, the nextcolumn givesthe properdatatype

foreach parameter. In general,pointersare address locationswhich arein octal.

Block sizesaresimplythe numberofV-memorylocations,soit’seasiest tothinkof

these quantitiesasBCD numbers. Otherdatasuch asthe passwordisalsoaBCD

number.The ranges columnslist the acceptablerange ofaddressesforpointers,or

simple numericrangesforblock sizesand data.Besuretofind the columnforthe

particularCPUyou are using.

DV-1000 Setup Parameters

PLC CPU

V-memory

Locations

DV-1000

Parameter

Description

Data

Type

DL130

DL230

Ranges

DL240,

Ranges

DL250

DL350

DL430

Ranges

DL440

Ranges

DL450

Ranges

V7620 Change

Preset

Values

Pointer

OctalV2000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377

V1400 to

V7377

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000 -

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000 -

V37777

V7621 Change

Preset

Titles

Pointer

OctalV2000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377

V1400 to

V7377

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7622 Change

Preset

Block Size

BCD 1-- 16 1 -- 16 1 -- 32 1 -- 32 1 -- 32

V7623 Numeric

Message

Pointer

OctalV2000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377

V1400 to

V7377

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7624 Text

Message

Pointer

OctalV0000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377

V1400 to

V7377

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7625 BitControl

Pointer

OctalX,Y,or

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,or

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,GX,

orC

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,GX,

orC

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,GX,

orC

V--mem.

locations

V7626 Power-up

Operational

Mode

BCD 0,1,2,

12,3

0,1,2,

12,3

0,1,2,

12,3

0,1,2,

12,3

0,1,2,

12,3

V7627 Change

Preset

Value

Password

BCD 0000 to

9999

0000 to

9999

0000 to

9999

0000 to

9999

0000 to

9999

V7720*Titled Timer

Preset

Value

Pointer

Octal-- V2000 to

V4377

V1400 to

V7377

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7721*Titled

Counter

PresetValue

Pointer

Octal-- V2000 to

V4377

V1400 to

V7377

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7722*,

High byte

Titled Timer

Preset

Block Size

BCD -- 1to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99

V7722*,

Lowbyte

Titled

Counter

PresetBlock

Size

BCD -- 1to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememorylocationsV7640 thruV7642 here.

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

The following figuresummarizesthe V-memorymap information forthe eightCPUs

listed inthe previoustable.Thesememorygraphs showthe identical location of the

setup parametersforall CPUtypes.The amountofuserdatamemory space

increaseswith eachCPUtype fromleft toright. ForeachCPU, the setup parameters

which are pointersmustpoint tospacewithinthe userdataspaceshown.

In ordertosimplifyexamplesinthismanual,wewill confine DV-1000 related datato

amemoryarea common to all CPUtypes.Therefore, the exampleswill use a block

ofmemory starting atV2000.Thisallows specificexampleladderprogramstowork

forall CPUtypes.The onlyexception tothisisthatDL130 and DL230 CPUsdo not

havememorylocationsV7720--V7722 and useV7640--V7642 instead.

V2000

V2377

V4000

V4177

V7620

V7647

DL130

DL230

V--Memory

DL240

V--Memory

UserDataSpace

DV-1000 Setup Parameters

The V-memoryaddresseslistedare

the octalmemory startingandending

referencesforthe shadedareas.

V2000

V4377

V7620

V7722

DL250

DL350

DL430

V--Memory

V1400

V7377

V7620

V7722

DL440

V--Memory

V1400

V7377

V10000

V17777

V7620

V7722

DL450

V--Memory

V1400

V7377

V7620

V7722

V10000

V37777

V-MemoryMaps

DV-1000 Setup Parameters

Entering Setup Parameters

Three maintechniquesare availableforsetting the valuesof the DV-1000 setup

parameters:

Using yourRLL/RLLPLUSprogram-- (the recommended approach)Ladderlogic

initializesanyrequired setup parametersduring the firstscan (usecontactSP0).

The DV-1000 readsthese atpowerup orwhen a keypad entryrequestsamode

change.Thismethod hasthe advantage ofimbedding the setup parametervaluesin

the mainladderprogramwhichrelieson them,also enabling you to add comments

tothe setup parameters.

Using theDirectSOFT memory editororDV-1000 setup utility-- You can usethe

memoryeditororDV-1000 setup utilityinDirectSOFT to enterthe propersetup

parametervaluesinspecificV-memorylocations.Bothmethodsprovide toolsto

allowyou to quicklyentervaluesasdifferentdatatypes(BCD/HEX, Octal,Text...).

The disadvantage to using thesemethodsisthe setup parametersaresusceptibleto

change orloss withnoindication given tothe user.Somescenariosare:

SThe batterywhichsupportsretentiveV-memorylocations can become

weakor maybe removed,causingaloss ofsetup parametersinthe

CPUV-memoryduring a powerfailure.

SSomeone elsemayinadvertentlyeditparametervalues,overwriting the

originalsettings.

SIf someone swapsthe CPUforanotherand copiesthe ladderprogram

fromthe oldtothe new CPU,itiseasy toforgetaboutcopying the setup

parametersaswell.

Because of thesescenariosand their resulting confusion,werecommend the first

method above:initializing the setup parametersinthe application ladderprogram.

Toinitializesetup parameters, the ladderprogram mustload the desired constants

intospecificV-memorylocations.The DV-1000 readsits setup parametersfrom

V-memoryateach powerup,and afteramode change fromthe keypad.The ladder

programneedsonlytoinitializesetup parameterson the firstscan.Soon afterthe

firstscan, the DV-1000 retrievesits setup parametersfromV-memory,and uses

themthereafter.The following general ladderprogramshowsthe recommended

ladderprogramarrangement.

SP0LD

K1234

Load the desired setup value intothe accumulator (“K1234”

isan example only).Sometimesthiswill beaconstant, or

othertimesan octaladdress.

Afterthe parametersetup rung(s)above,we beginthe

normal ladderprogram.Useyouractualprogramforthis

and the following rungs.

OUT

Vxxxx

Then placethe value inthe properV-memorylocation for

the selected setup parameter.

Repeat the above procedureforasmany setup parameters

asarerequired bythe DV-1000 modesto be used.

FirstScanOnly,LoadSetup Parameters

Main LadderProgramBegins

Use theLDA instruction whenloading octaladdresses!

Methodsfor

Entering theSetup

Parameters

ParameterSetup

ByLadderProgram

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

Using theLDA Instruction forPointerSetup Parameters

The previous section on the Power-up Defaultparameterdemonstrateshowto

programaconstantinthe setup parametertable and see the results.Mostof the

remaining parametersare of the address pointertype.Wewill only coverthe general

case ofpointersinthis section,sorefertospecific chapterson the modes

corresponding to any specificpointerstype parameters you maybe interested in.

It isusuallyeasiest tothinkofaddress pointersasoctalnumbers,justastheyare

numbered inthe I/O map.However, the address pointersmustbe stored in hex

format. The LoadAddress (LDA)boxinstruction makesthe octal-to-hex

conversion automatically.The following ladderexample assumes you wanta pointer

toV-memorylocation (octal)V2000.

SP0LDA

O2000

Usethe LDA(Load Address)instruction toload the octal

numberinthe box(2000,inthisexample)intothe

accumulator,automatically converting it toitshexadecimal

equivalent. The number (octal)2000 isjustan example.

OUT

Vxxxx

Placethe value inmemorylocation Vxxxx (replace“xxxx”

withthe actual location of the setup parameteryou are

programming).

FirstScanOnly,LoadAddress PointerSetup Parameter

XAfterthe parametersetup rung(s)above,we beginthe

normal ladderprogram.Useyouractualprogramforthis

and the following rungs.

Main LadderProgramBegins

You mustusethe letter “O”forthe octalnumbertofollow.

DV-1000 Setup Parameters

Powerup DefaultOperationalMode

Wewill beginto usesetup parameterswiththe simplestand most fundamentalof

themall: the powerup defaultmode.Asingleconstantinthe setup parametertableis

all that’srequired.The keypad and displayexerciseinChapter1 demonstrated that

severaloperationalmodesare available byusing the keypad. In an actualfactory

installation,itisunlikelythatan operatorwill be present to usethe keypad ateach

systempowerup.Therefore,itisimportant to provide a method to determine

beforehand the mode the DV-1000 automaticallyentersatpowerup. It’sa good idea

to programthe powerup defaultparameter,regardless ofwhichDV-1000 mode(s)

you intend to use.The availableselectionsare:

SEnterpreviousmode (atpower-down)

SEnterChange PresetMode

SEnter Message DisplayMode withoutBitControl

SEnter Message DisplayMode withBitControl

SEnterStatusDisplayMode

In ordertoselect the properpower-up defaultmode foryourapplication,you need to

knowsomething abouthowthe DV-1000 will be used inthe finished machine or

factoryprocess. Insomesituations,asingle operatorwill frequentlyusethe keypad

and change DV-1000 modesfromone to another.Theymayexpect the DV-1000 to

remaininthe mode theywerelastusing,even aftera powercycle.The firstchoice on

the listabovewill do this. In othersituations,multiple personnel will usethe keypad.

Or, the application mayusethe DV-1000’sdisplaymainlyfor monitoring purposes. In

thesecases you maywant tosetup the DV-1000 to enteraspecificoperational

mode ateverypowerup,whichthe remaining selectionsinthe listwill do.

Asingle parameterselectsthe powerup defaultoperationalmode,stored inBCD

formatatV7626.The following tableliststhe defaultchoicesand the required setup

parameters.

Power-up DefaultOperationalModeV7626 BCD Value

PreviousMode:

Change Preset, or

Message Mode,or

StatusMode

0000

Change Preset0001

Message Mode withoutBitControlMode 0002

Message Mode withBitControlMode 0012

StatusMode 0003

NOTE:The power-up default“PreviousMode” (code 0000)will powerup anyof

three modes,butBitControl isnotoffered (forsafetyreasons).So,even ifyou

manuallyput the DV-1000 inBitControlMode beforethe powercycle, the unitwill not

powerup inBitControlMode.Thisisdone forsafetyreasons,becausethereisno

constantindication that the unitisinBitControlMode. If you want the DV-1000 to

powerup inBitControlMode,you mustchoose“Message Mode withBitControl”by

entering “0012”inlocation V7626.

Powerup Default

Setup Parameter

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

The following flowchartshowsthe DV-1000’sactionson powerup.ItbeginswithBit

Controldisabled.Then itreadsthe setup parameteratV7626 forthe power-up

defaultmode.

Powerup

0000 0001 0002 0012 0003

Examine contentsofV7626 forpower-up defaultmode.

Enter

ChangePreset

Mode

Enable

BitControl

Mode

Enter

StatusDisplay

Mode

Enter

MessageDisplay

Mode

Recall Mode at

Powerdown

ChangePreset

MessageDisplay

StatusDisplay

Disable

BitControl

Mode

Select the value to placeinV7626 according tothe desired defaultpowerup mode:

SPreviousMode (atpower-down) -- Powerdownin eitherChange Preset,

Message Display,orStatusDisplaymodes.The DV-1000 will powerup

inthe previousmode.

SChange PresetMode -- the operatorusesthe keypad tochange data

valuesatselected memorylocations shownonthe display.

SMessage DisplayMode -- displaymessages(textand numbers).This

can be withorwithoutBitControlMode,becausethe twomodesare

independent. Message DisplayMode (once entered)utilizesonlythe

display,whileBitControlMode (once entered)utilizesonlythe keypad.

SStatusDisplayMode -- tomonitorvaluesofV-memorylocations

selected fromthe keypad.

NOTE:If you useMessage Mode withBitControlenabled asthe power-up default,

werecommend using yourladderprogramtowriteamessage tothe DV-1000

displayindicating bitcontrolmode.See the chapteron BitControlMode for more

details,including an example program.

Powerup Sequence

DV-1000 Setup Parameters

Now we give an exampleladderprogramto enterthe Power-up Default Operational

Mode you haveselected inV7626.The programuses“Message Mode withoutBit

Control”,just forexample.AnEND coil on the lastrung makesthisacomplete but

simple example program.

SP0LD

Load the constantK2intothe accumulator, toselect

Message mode withoutBitControl.

Afterthe parametersetup rung(s)above,we beginthe

normal ladderprogram. Insertyouractualprogrambefore

the end coil.

OUT

V7626

Placethe value inmemorylocation V7626, the location of

the Power--up DefaultOperation Mode selection.

END

LoadSetup Parameters

FirstScanOnly

Totest the programand confirm ourunderstanding of the Powerup Defaultmode,

enterthe programaboveintoyourCPU.Then put the CPU inrun mode,whichwill

placethe constantK2inmemorylocation V7626 on the firstscan.Nowfollowthe

stepsbelowtotest the Powerup Default feature.

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

The goal isjust to havethe DV-1000 insomemode otherthan the powerup default

whichwe haveselected inthe programabove. It isnow inStatusDisplayMode.Now

power-cyclethe DV-1000 byunplugging itor removing powertothe CPU.Then

restore power,and do notpress any keyon the DV-1000 keypad at thispoint. The

displaybelow(orperhapsasetup error message)should appearafter2 or3

seconds.This confirmsthe DV-1000 read the constantK2 defaultselection atV7626

and entered the Message DisplayMode whichwe had chosen.

7654321076543210

0000000000000000

(NOKEY PRESS

REQUIRED)

Powerup Default

ExampleProgram

DV--1000 Setup Parameters

ChapterSummary

Now we havecovered the varioustypesofsetup parameters,and theirlocationsin

V-memory.The Powerup Defaultparameterand LDAinstruction have been covered

in detail.The remainderof the setup parametersare discussed in eachchapteron

the corresponding modes.

Now wemay summarizesome of the keypointswe havelearned aboutsetup

parametersinthis chapter:

SSetup parametersoccupyV-memoryinthe CPU,notDV-1000 memory.

SThe DV-1000 onlyreadsthe setup parametersatpowerup,orwhen a

keyon the keypad ispressed.

SIt’sa good idea to programthe powerup defaultparameter,regardless

ofwhichDV-1000 mode(s)you intend to use.

SParametersbelong to one of three types:Pointers,Block Sizes,orData.

SEnterpointersasoctal(address)numbers,while block sizesand data

are always BCD numbers.

SYou can programsetup parametersusing yourRLL programorby

editing V-memorydirectly.However,itisgenerallymore desirableto use

the RLL program.

SYou onlyneed to programthe setup parametersonceinaladder

program.Usethe specialcontactSP0to activatethe setup rung on the

firstscan only.

SYou onlyneed to programsetup parametersforthe mode(s)you intend

to use.The instructionstosetup the variousmodesmaybe combined

intothe samerung.

SAll ladderexamplesinthismanualuseV-memoryuserdataspace

starting atV2000. Inthisway, the examples shownwill workacross the

variousCPUtypes.

SIt isgenerallybest tochart(plan)yourV-memorymap beforewriting the

application RLL program.Thisensurestherewill be V-memory space

availableforthe DV-1000’sdata blocks forthe mode(s)used.

Summaryof

Key Points

Message

Display Mode

In ThisChapter....

—Overview

—System Messages

—User Messages

—Setup ParametersforUser Messages

—DisplayingNumbers

—DisplayingText

—UsingLDD andOUTDInstructions

—TurningDataIntoMessages

—CombinedNumeric andTextDisplays

—Usingthe ASCII Constant(ACON)Instruction

—MessageDisplayApplicationsandTechniques

—ChapterSummary

Message DisplayMode

Overview

The Message DisplayMode of the DV-1000 providesamonitoring function. It

supportsSystem Messagesfromthe CPU(no setup parametersrequired).

SError Messages

SFAULTinstruction messagesfromladderlogic

The DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 CPUsrecordamessage log of16

error messagesand 16 FAULTinstruction messages,eachwithatime/datestamp.

The DV-1000 providesaccess tothesemessage logsfromits keypad.

WithMessage DisplayMode you can createyourown displays (User Messages)

using setup parametersand ladderprogramming.

SCreatetextornumericmessages

SMixtextand numericmessages

SImplementblinking (flashing)characters, foralarm conditions,etc.

SCreatemultiplescreensthatletyou switchfromone to another

SDisplay signed values(+/-- sign followsactualvalue)

SEmbed a decimalpointin a number

SEmbed the time and dateinamessage

SUsethe extended ASCII characterset foreffects such asanalog bar

graphs,orothersymbolicinformation

SGeneratelong messagesthatcontinuously scroll through the display

can comefromthree sources:(System)

FaultMessagesand Error Messages,and

(DV-1000)User Messages.Tothe right

are examplesofeach.

In normalconditions,user messagesare

the defaultdisplay.However,system

messageshave displaypriority.For

example,if the batteryisremoved the

error message “E042 NOCPUBATT”

temporarilyreplacesthe user message.

When a FaultMessage Boxisexecuted,

itsdisplayoutputhaspriorityoverboth

systemerror messagesand user

messages.When the cause ofa higher

prioritymessage ceases, the nextlower

prioritymessage reappearsautomatically.

The prioritized orderis:

1.SystemFaultMessage (highest)

2.SystemError Message

3.User Messages(lowest)

SystemFaultMesssage

7654321076543210

* P A R T J A M , Z O N E 1

7654321076543210

E042 NO CPU BATT

SystemErrorMessage

CONVEYOR SPEEDS

L i n e 1 = 1 2 3 f p m

L i n e 2 = 4 5 6 f p m

L i n e 3 = 7 8 9 f p m

UserMessage

FeatureList

MessagePriority

Message DisplayMode

Aquick waytolearn howthe DV-1000 works istoload an example program related

toyourapplication,and beginmodifying it to do whatyou wantit to do.Example

ladderprogramsinthis chapteroccasionallyrequire an external input tocausethe

displaytochange insome particularway.The programsrequire up totwoinputs:X0

and X1.So, thisisa good timeto prepareyoursystemtorun the example programs

as you arrive ateach one.

If you are usingaDL405 system,werecommend using the inputsimulator module. If

you locateitinthe base asthe closestinputmoduletothe CPU,itwill log in asX0

through X17 as showninthe following diagram:

16pt

Input

InputSimulator

MSB LSB

X17

013456789101112131415 2Bit

Slot0Slot1Slot2Slot3Slot4Slot5

If you are usingaDL305 sytemwithaDL350 CPU,werecommend using the input

simulator.Ifyou locateitinthe base asthe closestinputmoduletothe CPU,itwill log

in asX0through X7 as showninthe following diagram:

MSB LSB

013456789101112131415 2Bit

InputSimulator

8pt

InputDL350

CPU

System

Requirementsfor

ExamplePrograms

DL405

Requirements

DL350 CPU

Requirements

Message DisplayMode

If you are usingaDL205 system,werecommend using the inputsimulator. If you

locateitinthe base asthe closestinputmoduletothe CPU,itwill log in asX0through

X7 as showninthe following diagram:

8pt

Input

Slot0Slot1Slot2Slot3Slot4

MSB LSB

013456789101112131415 2Bit

InputSimulator

If you are usingaDL105 systemwithDC inputs,werecommend using the input

simulator,shown below,which providesfourinputswitchesforinputsX0through X3.

DC-powered versionsneed twowiresfromthe powerinput tothe twoleft-most

terminalson the simulator.The inputsimulatorwill notworkinDL105swithACtype

inputs.See the DL105 User Manual(D2-USER-M) for moreinformation on the input

simulator.

NOTE:When starting DirectSOFT,be suretoinitializethe CPUscratchpad orsome

example programswill notwork(inputsX0 and X1will be inactive).FromPLCmenu,

chooseSetup, then InitializeScratchpad.

MSB LSB

013456789101112131415 2Bit

engineering

OFF

FACTS

F1--04SIM

InputSimulator

X0SwitchX1Switch

DL205

Requirements

DL105

Requirements

Message DisplayMode

SystemMessages

You may selectMessage DisplayMode atanytimefromthe keypad bypressing the

MessageKey(unless the keypad isinBitControlMode).User messagesrequire

setup parameterstotell the DV-1000 wheretofind itsmessage datainV-memory. If

the parametersare notsetand V-memory containsall zeros, the displaybelow will

appear.

7654321076543210

0000000000000000

PRESS

The nextsection showshowto programthe setup parametersand generateyour

ownmessage.However,wefirstdiscuss the higherpriority system messages.

SystemErrorsand the FaultMessage instruction boxinladderlogicgenerates

messagesforthe outside world.They can be viewed using DirectSOFT,a

Hand-heldProgrammer,orthe DV-1000.The DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and

DL450 CPUsretain a log ofup to 16 systemerror messagesand a log ofup to 16

faultmessageswhichmayalsobeviewed.

The following ladderprogramexamplewill send a FaultMessage tothe displayas

long as contactX0ison.When X0 goesoff, the displayreturnstothe user-generated

message.Although the FAULTinstruction can display23 characterson a Hand-Held

Programmer,limit thenumberofcharactersto15 fortheDV-1000 (top line).

FAULT

OutputaFaultMessage when X0isactive.Constant

K1referencesthe Data Labelarea thatcontainsthe

textmessage.NOTE:If using DL105 be sureCPUis

initialized tomakeX0 operational.

FaultMessage

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxtotype the text

forthe FaultMessage.Limit thisline to15characters

maximum.

END

DLBL

ACON

BINEMPTY

The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data area

containing ACONorNCONboxes.The reference

numberforthisarea is“1”,specified byK1.

Selecting

MessageMode

FaultInstruction

Message

a:\msg1.prj

Message DisplayMode

Load the programabove and testitby

turning on X0.WhileX0ison, the fault

message will be displayed.When itis

turned off, the faultmessage isremoved

and the originalmessage displayreturns.

FaultInstruction Messsage

7654321076543210

*BIN EMPTY

NOTE:The ladderprogramabove generatesfaultmessageswhichimmediately

appearon the display.However,notethat the faultinstruction makesan entryinto

the faultmessage log on eachscan the faultboxisactive.Therefore, thisapproach

fillsup the message log in16CPUscanswith duplicate entries.Tomake onlyone

entryinthe log perfaultevent, usethe nextladderexamplewiththe PDcoil.

Systemerror messages createtheirown

textwhen the erroreventoccurs.When

the DV-1000 isinMessage Mode, the

errorcode and message are displayed as

long asthe errorpersists. Or,you may

press the ClearKeyto acknowledge the

message,and itwill be removed fromthe

log and fromthe display.7654321076543210

E 0 4 2 N O C P U B A T T

SystemErrorMessage

The DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 CPUsrecord up to 16 SystemError

Messagesand 16 FaultMessagesinseparatemessage logs.The PLCattachesa

time/datestampto each errororfaultmessage when theyoccur.Thesemaybe

viewed one atatimewiththe DV-1000,asdepicted inthe following figure.

READ

DATETIMEFAULT MESSAGE

01 08/10/95 09:35:50 PARTJAMMED

02 08/11/95 08:00:43 BINEMPTY

03 08/11/95 07:15:53 OVERTEMP

04 08/20/95 17:22:48 LOWFLOW

05 08/30/95 17:22:24 PUMPFAULT

06 08/30/95 17:22:24 GATE STUCK

: : : :

16 09/02/95 9:22:16 SETUPINVALID

ExampleMessageLog

SystemError

Display

Viewing

MessageLogs

(DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL440 and

DL450 Only)

Message DisplayMode

The faultmessage log recordsa newentryon eachscanafaultmessage boxis

active.Thismeansthatifwe usethe previousladderexamplewith a simpleswitch

activating the faultmessage, the faultmessage log will fill up with duplicate

messagesinjust16 scans.Afterthat, morefaultmessagesjustoverwrite existing

log entries.Therefore,we add a PDcoil (positive differential)which activatesforone

scan when the off-to-on transition ofX0 occurs.

FAULT

FaultMessage,OneScanOnly

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxtotype the text

forthe FaultMessage.Limit thisline to15characters

max.

END

DLBL

ACON

BINEMPTY

The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data area

containing ACONorNCONboxes.The reference

numberforthisarea is“1”,specified byK1.

TurnonC0forone scan when X0makesan

OFF-to-ONtransition.

Outputafaultmessage wheneverC0isactive.

Because of the PDcoil,onlyone errorlog entryoccurs

foreach event.

Enterthe programabove orload it fromthe example disk intoyourCPU.Aftergoing

toRUN Mode, turnX0 on and off oncetocause one faultmessage entryinthe

message log.The message logsare accessible using the OptionsMenu.Press the

OptionsKeytoreachthe menu shown below.Then usethe Plus(+)Keytomove

the cursoroverthe thirdmenu selection,SHOWERR/MSG.

7654321076543210

O P T I O N

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 P A S S W O R D

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

7654321076543210

SHOW ERR/MSG

1 E R R O R L I S T

2 M E S S A G E L I S T

PRESS

Finally,select the message listusing the

Plus(+)Key,and press Enter.Hereisthe

lastentryinthe message log,and itshould

showthe resultsofyour running the

programabove.Usethe Minus(--) Keyto

move upwardthrough the log when

multiple entriesexist, and the Plus(+)Key

tomove downward.

NOTE:FaultMessage timestamps

include hundredthsofasecond.

7654321076543210

B i n E m p t y

0 7 / 2 5 / 9 5

15:57:24:86

PRESS

Fault MessageLog

(DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL440 and

DL450 Only)

a:\msg2.prj

Message DisplayMode

The SystemErrorLog featureinthe CPUrecordsa newentrywhenevereach error

firstoccurs.Noladderlogicisrequired tocreatethe log.Log entries consistofan

errorcode, textdescription,and a time/datestamp.The log recordsup to 16 error

events.Each erroreventmaylastafewmilliseconds,or manyhours,butonlyone

log entryismade perevent. Subsequentsystemerrors create newentriesinthe log.

Toviewthe SystemErrorLog,usethe sameOptionsMenu asthe FaultMessage

Log,bypressing the OptionsKey.Then usethe Plus(+)Keytomovethe cursor

overthe thirdmenu selection,SHOWERR/MSG.

7654321076543210

O P T I O N

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 P A S S W O R D

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

7654321076543210

SHOW ERR/MSG

1 E R R O R L I S T

2 M E S S A G E L I S T

PRESS

Finally,select the errorlistusing the Enter

Key.The displaytothe rightshowsalow

battery voltage eventasthe lastentryin

the message log.Usethe Minus(--) Key

toreviewupwardthrough the log

whenever multiple entriesexist, and the

Plus(+)Keytomove downward.

7654321076543210

E 0 4 1 C P U B A T T E R -

Y L O W

0 7 / 2 5 / 9 5

2 1 : 2 5 : 1 0

PRESS

SystemErrorLog

(DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL440 and

DL450 Only)

Message DisplayMode

UserMessages

User Messagesrelyon datastored inV-memoryto actually createthe message.The

process is showninthe following figure.Afterpowerup, the DV-1000 readsthe setup

parameters.Certain parameters can be programmed to point to otherblocks of

information inV-memory.The DV-1000 readsthe textand numericdata pointed to

bythe setup parameters.Then itcombinestextand numericdatafollowing simple

rulestocreatethe displayoutput. Then itreadsthe V-memorymessage data again,

and repeatsthe process overand over.

V--MemorySpace

UserV-memory

Setup Parameters

MESSAGE

READ

(atpowerup)

READ,

repeatedly

The DV-1000 currentlyreadsthe setup

parametersatpowerup,and when a key

on the keypad ispressed.Thismeansthat

the ladderprogramcannotsimply change

the pointervalue for message data.

Instead,itmustmove newdataintothe

originalmessage data block.This chapter

coversthe use ofACONand MOVMC

instructions,whichmakethistask easier.

V--MemorySpace

UserV-memory

Setup Parameters

MESSAGE

MSGDATA1

MSGDATA2

Message DisplayMode

Setup ParametersforUserMessages

The DV-1000 is capable ofdisplaying numbersoralphabeticalcharacters,ora

combination ofboth(alphanumeric).All of the programming to do thismustbe

contained inthe CPU’sladderlogicprogram.Thismeansthata portion of the ladder

programisdedicated tothe DV-1000 operation,whilethe remainderof the program

handlesmachine orprocess operation.The Message DisplayMode doesrequire

setup parameters(see Chapter3foran introduction tosetup parameters).

There aretwo pointersinthe setup

parameterswhich pertaintomessage

displays:

SNumericMessage Pointer

STextMessage Pointer

Thesetwosetup parametersarelocated

atV7623 and V7624 respectively.The

diagramtothe rightshowshowthe values

xxxx and yyyy point tothe address

locationsofblocks ofdatainthe userdata

space ofV-memory.

The relativesizesof the shaded blocks

indicatethat the textdata block (32 words)

istwicethe size of the numericdata(16

words).We explainwhythisistrue a bit

laterinthis chapter.These block sizesare

fixed (thereisno block sizesetup

parameterforthese).

V0000

V--MemorySpace

End ofV--

Memory

UserData

NumericPointer=xxxx

TextPointer=yyyy

Vxxxx NumericData

TextData

V7623

V7624

Vyyyy

Setup Parameters

Now we decide whereto place our

numericand textdata blocks foruseinthe

example programsinthis chapter.As

described inChapter2,wewill use an

availablememoryarea common to all

CPUtypes,starting atV2000.Therefore,

numericdata occupies16 wordlocations,

fromV2000 toV2017.We’ll arbitrarily

placethe text tablestarting atV2100. It

occupies32 wordlocations,extending

downtoV2137.Notethateithertextor

numericdatamaybe placed firstin

V-memory.However, the blocks mustnot

overlap each other,butone may

immediatelyfollowthe other.

The locationswe havechosen herefor

numericand textdata are examplesonly.

The location you chooseforyour

application maybe different.

V0000

V--MemorySpace

End ofV--

Memory

UserData

NumericPointer=2000

TextPointer=2100

V2000 NumericData

TextData

V7623

V7624

V2100

V2017

V2137

MessageData

Parameters

Choosing Data

Block Locations

Message DisplayMode

Nowthatwe havechosen locationsfornumericand textdata,wecan createthe

setup portion of the ladderlogicprogram.The following ladderprogramlocatesthe

data blocks according tothe memorymap on the previouspage.Also,weinclude

instructionswhichmakeMessage Mode the DV-1000 power-up defaultmode.For

the ladderexamplesinthis chapter, the DV-1000 will automaticallypowerup in

Message DisplayMode.All ladderexamplesinthis chapterwill usethe following

programasthe firstrung to programthe setup parameters.

SP0LDA

O2000

Load octaladdress 2000 intothe accumulator.This

instruction automatically convertsthe address intoits

hexadecimalequivalent.

OUT

V7623

Output thisaddress toV7623, the location of the setup

parameterwhichisthe numericmessage block pointer.

ParameterSetup:Numeric and TextData

LDA

O2100

Load octaladdress 2100 intothe accumulator.This

instruction automatically convertsthe address intoits

hexadecimalequivalent.

OUT

V7624

Output thisaddress toV7624, the location of the setup

parameterwhichisthe textmessage pointer.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK2(BCD)intothe accumulator.The

value “2”correspondstoMessage DisplayMode asthe

Power-up DefaultMode.This step isoptional.

OUT

V7626

Output the constant2toV7624, the location of the

Power-up Defaultsetup parameter.

Optional

Afterentering the setup program

above,you can testitbypowering up

the PLCand DV-1000.Notethat the

V-memorydata areasmustbe cleared

(all zeros).The displaytothe rightwill

appearwithoutyourhaving to usethe

keypad.7654321076543210

0000000000000000

LadderExample

forMessageSetup

Parameters

ParameterSetup

Program#1

Message DisplayMode

As you programand usethe DV-1000,itwill eventuallybe in other modeswhen you

need to usethe Message DisplayMode.Justpress the MessageKeyon the

keypad. If the setup parametersexistand arevalid, the message displaywill appear.

If theyare not, the error message will be displayed:“Setup ParameterError”. If this

occurs,examine the parametersetup rung inthe ladderprogram,using the program

above asan example.Verifythe numericand textdata blocks arelocated in

available userdataspace ofV-memory(refertoChapter3forCPU-specificmemory

maps).

7654321076543210

0000000000000000

PRESS

NOTE:Remembertoload the example programswhilethe CPU isin program

mode.Afterloading the program, takethe CPUfromprogram mode torun mode.

Mostof the examplesinthis chapterhaveafirstscan rung (SP0).Thisrequiresa

program-to-run mode transition orpowercycle,orthe examplemaynotwork

properly!

Message DisplayMode

Displaying Numbers

organized as16-bitnumbers.Thesemay

be BCD orhexnumbers. In eithercase,

they containfourdigits.The exampleto

the rightshowsmemorylocation V-2000,

whichcontainsthe number “3765”.

The DV-1000 interpretsthe numericdata

block directly,and displays themas

numbers.The value “3765”automatically

appearson the displayinthe

corresponding numericdisplayposition

when the same numberexistsin

V-memory,and isreferenced bythe setup

parameters.

MSB LSB

Digit1Digit2Digit3Digit4

0 10 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

013456789101112131415 2Bit

3 7 6 5

NumericOutput

V2000

The following exampleshowshoweasy itisto displaya numberfromyourladder

logicprogram.All you need isthe setup programinthe previous section, followed by

arung thatplacesthe number “1234”asthe firstnumericdata block entry.The

DV-1000 then displays the numberat the corresponding firstnumericposition on the

display.

SP0LD

K1234

Load the arbitrary constant“1234”intothe accumulator.

Thisisthe numberwewill display.We onlyneed todothis

once,on the firstscan.

OUT

V2000

Output the constant“1234”tolocation V2000, the first

numericdatalocation.This value will appearinthe first

numericposition inthe display,shown below.

FirstNumericDataLocation Programmed

FirstScan

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

Afterloading the programabove,you can

testitbytaking the PLCfromProgramto

Run Mode.The BCD constant“1234”

appearsinthe firstnumericposition of the

display,inthe upperrightcorner.We

discuss the entire displayoutputpositions

a bit furtherinthis chapter.7654321076543210

0000000000001234

0000000000000000

a:\msg3.prj

Message DisplayMode

Inrealapplications, the numbers you want to displaywill often be changing.Process

variables such astemperature, flowrate,orconveyorspeed can be displayed inreal

time.Whilethe setup parametersarewritten onlyonce(firstCPUscan),process

variablesmustbe constantlywritten. In ourexample,itmeanswriting a changing

numbertolocation V-2000.The DV-1000 takes care of the restof the work.Because

oursetup parameters specifythe location of the numeric(and text)data, the

DV-1000 constantly scansthesesothatany change can be observed inthe display.

Tosimulate a changing value,we usethe following program rungstojustalternate

between twovalues.Itusesaspecialrelay contactSP4 asa1second timer (1/2sec.

on,1/2sec.off).Keeping the ParameterSetup rung,add the following rungsasthe

main program.

SP4LD

K1234

Forthe firsthalfofeachsecond,load the arbitrary constant

1234 intothe accumulator.SpecialcontactSP4ison 1/2

second,and off 1/2second.

Demonstration ofChanging Values

SP1OUT

V2000

Outputwhatevervalue isinthe accumulatortolocation

V2000.Halfof the timeitwill be “1234”and the otherhalfof

the timeitwill be “5678”.

Always On

SP4LD

K5678

Forthe second halfofeachsecond,load the arbitrary

constant5678 intothe accumulator.SpecialcontactSP4is

on 1/2second,and off 1/2second.

1Sec Timer

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 5 6 7 8

0000000

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

Alternates

every 1/2

second

The pointis:Yourladderprogramneedstowritethe Setup Parametersonlyon the

firstscan,butitmustupdatethe numericand textdatainV-memoryasoften astheir

contentchanges.The DV-1000 readsthe numericand textdatarepeatedlyduring

operation. If the textornumericdatachanges, the displaythen automaticallyfollows.

Displaying

a:\msg4.prj

Message DisplayMode

Displaying Text

Nextwe discuss howto displaytextinmessage displays.The textdata block is

located atV2100 inthese examples(onlybecausethatiswhere oursetup

parameterhasdefined it to be).However,wecannotplace alphabeticalcharacters

directlyinV-memory. Instead,we use a numeric code whichrepresentstext

characters,called ASCII codes.Below isa portion of the ASCII tablewhichlists

capital letters(see AppendixBforthe completetable ofcharactersand symbolswith

theirASCII codes).

ASCII

Code

Char.ASCII

Code

Char.ASCII

Code

Char.ASCII

Code

Char.

41 A48 H4FO56 V

42 B49 I50 P57 W

43 C4AJ51 Q58 X

44 D4B K 52 R59 Y

45 E4CL 53 S5AZ

46 F4DM54 T-- --

47 G4EN55 U-- --

AnASCII code isan 8-bitbinarynumber (byte) representing a singletextcharacter

orsymbol.Therefore,eachV-memorylocation (16-bitdataword)in ourtext table

can containtwoASCII codes,representing twocharacters.

letters“A”and “Z”.The ASCII codesfor

these are 41 and 5A(in hexadecimal)

respectively.Memorylocation V2100 is

the first textdatalocation,shown

containing the codesforthe letters“A”and

“Z”.

MSB LSB

013456789101112131415 2Bit

Second

Char.Code

5A=“Z”

First

Char.Code,

41 =“A”

0 0 0 0 01011 0 1 01

0 1

Message DisplayMode

Usethe following ladder rung asthe main programtoload the ASCII codesfor “A”

and “Z”intothe first textdatalocation (keep the Setup Parameter rung inthe

program).

SP1LD

K415a

Load the ASCII codesforthe letters“A”and “Z”intothe

accumulator.

OUT

V2100

Output the ASCII textdatatolocation V2100, the first text

datalocation.The corresponding letters“A”and “Z”will

displayinthe first textlocation inthe display,shown below.

FirstTextDataLocation Programmed

Always On

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

Afterloading the programabove,you can

testitbytaking the PLCfromProgramto

Run Mode.The letters“AZ”appearinthe

first textposition of the display,inthe

upperleft corner.Unless you havecleared

V2000, the number “1234”or “5678”from

the previousexamplewill be displayed in

the upper rightcorner.

7654321076543210

AZ00000000001234

0000000000000000

a:\msg5.prj

Message DisplayMode

Using LDD and OUTDInstructions

The regularLDand OUTinstruction manipulatesa 16--bitword,updating twoASCII

characterson the display.However,wecan usethe Load Double(LDD)and Out

Double(OUTD)tomanipulate 32--bitdoublewords,updating fourcharactersata

time(twotextpositions)!

NOTE:Ifyou haveless than 10 charactersto place,using the LDD instruction(s)isa

good choice.However,forplacing morethanadozencharacters adjacently,

theACONInstruction ismucheasierand more efficient.See the section on

using the ACON instruction on page 4--25.

Supposewe placethe characterstring “ABCD”inthe first twotextpositions.The

ASCII datafor “ABCD”will be stored inV2100,and V2101, the first two datawordsin

the textdata block.

7 6 5 4 3

A B C D

41 42 43 44

ASCII Codes

7 6 5 4

1 32 ...

TextDisplay

Positions

Display

Output

V-Memory

V2100 V2101

NOTE:You mustswap positionswiththe firstand second pairofASCII codesin a

LDD instruction.Read the following discussion tolearnwhythisisnecessary!

Message DisplayMode

The Load DoubleInstruction acceptsan

8-digitconstantK,representing two 16-bit

words.The mostsignificantwordxxxx is

on the left inthe LDD box.However, the

DV-1000 displays the textof the most

significantwordonthe right. Thismeans

thatyou mustswap orderof the two pairs

ofASCII codesinthe LDD boxrelativeto

how itisdisplayed.

The reason forthis swap isthatweread

fromleft toright, and the ASCII codesare

stored fromlower memoryaddress to

higher memoryaddresses. Onthe other

hand,computerdata numbering goes

from right(leastsignificant)toleft (most

significant).

LDD

Kxxxxyyyy

Mostsignificant

word(V2101)

Leastsignificant

word(V2100)

7 6 5 4

1 32 ...

Now let’susethe LDD instruction to place“ABCD”inthe first twotextpositions. Inthe

following figure, the method using the regularLDand OUTinstructionsison the left.

Onthe rightare examplesusing the LDD and OUTD instructions,withoutthe swap

(wrong)and withthe swap (correct).

LDD

K41424344

OUTD

V2100

K4142

OUT

V2100

K4344

OUT

V2101

LDD

K43444142

OUTD

V2100

LDand OUTInstructionsLDD and OUTDInstructions

Using Using

Wrong!

Correct!

Message DisplayMode

Turning DataintoMessages

Now we have displayed a numberand sometextusing single entries(one V-memory

location)inthe numericand text tables.You have probablynoticed that the first

locationsarein oppositecornersof the display.Refertothe figure below.Numeric

positionsincrement fromright toleft,like LSB toMSB orientation.Textpositions

increment fromleft toright,justasweread froma book.We numberthe positionsin

octal,and startwithzero.

7654321076543210

31 33

61 3 5 7

36343230

2321

12 14

2 1 0

13 11

6 4

16 14

1517

NumericDisplay PositionsTextDisplay Positions

(Octalnumbering ofpositions)

Firstnumericposition First textposition

The display containsatotalof16 numericand 32 textpositions.Each position

correspondsto one V-memorylocation (16-bitword).Each numericposition

occupies4characterspaces,while eachtextposition occupies2characterspaces.

The example programsinthismanualbeginsnumericdata block atV2000 and text

block data atV2100.The figure belowshowshownumericand textdatalocations

map to physical locationson the DV-1000 display.Because of the octalnumbering,

thedisplay position numbers are equaltothe address offsets!

31 33

61 3 5 7

36343230

2321

12 14

Text

Display Map

V2100

V2137

V2120

V2111

V2102

V2122

V2131 V2133

V2113

V2104

V2124

V2115

V2135

V2126

V2117

V2106V2101 V2103 V2105 V2107

V2127

V2136V2134V2132V2130

V2110

V2125

V2116

V2123V2121

V2112 V2114

3 2 1 0

13 11

6 4

16 14

1517

Numeric

Display Map

V2003 V2002 V2001 V2000

V2013 V2011

V2006 V2004

V2016 V2014

V2007

V2010

V2015V2017

V2012

V2005

Numbering of

Display Positions

Display Maps

Message DisplayMode

The figure belowshowsthe numericand textdatainV-memory.Fromthere, follow

the arrowsto detailed numericand text tableswhichshowthe V-memory contents

forthe examplesthusfarinthis chapter.Notice howthe offset fromthe base address

(V2000 and V2100)foreach data block correspondsto actualdisplayposition

numbering.Followthe arrowstothe bottomof the page,wherethe DV-1000

combinesnumericand textinformation into one display.

NumericDisplay OutputTextDisplay Output

Position NumberV-Memory

0 12342000

1 00002001

2 00002002

3 00002003

4 00002004

5 00002005

6 00002006

7 00002007

10 2010 0000

11 00002011

12 00002012

13 00002013

14 00002014

15 00002015

16 00002016

17 00002017

NumericData

Position Data TextV-Memory

0 415A A2100

1 00002101

2 00002102

3 00002103

4 00002104

5 00002105

6 00002106

7 00002107

10 2110 0000

11 00002111

12 00002112

13 00002113

14 00002114

15 00002115

16 00002116

17 00002117

20 00002120

21 00002121

22 00002122

23 00002123

24 00002124

25 00002125

26 00002126

27 00002127

30 00002130

31 00002131

32 00002132

33 00002133

34 00002134

35 00002135

36 00002136

37 00002137

Position Data TextV-Memory

TextData

V0000

End of

V-Memory

UserData

NumericPointer=2000

TextPointer=2100

V2000 NumericData

TextData

V7623

V7624

V2100

V2017

V2137

V-MemorySpace

DV-1000 Display

7654321076543210

AZ00000000001234

0000000000000000

7654321076543210

0000000000001234

0000000000000000

7654321076543210

A Z

Setup Parameters

HowMessageData

GetstotheDisplay

Message DisplayMode

CombinedNumeric and TextDisplays

Obviously, textand numbers cannotoccupythe same position on the actual

DV-1000 displayat the sametime.The twoV-memorydata blocks certainly coexist,

but the DV-1000 givesdisplayprioritytothe textdata.Eachtextcharacter’sdata

masks the corresponding numericaldigitif the text’sASCII code is20 (hex)or

greater.

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0000000

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

NumericOutput

TextOutput

3 2 1 0

0 0 A0 0 0 0 0

000B0 0 0

000C0 0

000D

ActualDisplay Output

outputasacontrolmask fornumeric

output. Refertothe figuretothe

right. If the numericdata block in

V-memoryisall zeros, the matching

numericoutputisalsozeros,as

shown.Nowsupposethe textdatais

also all zeros(null characters),

except forfour randomlocationsas

shown.TextdataASCII codes41

through 44 hexproducesthe letters

A,B,C,and D.Now wecometothe

actualdisplayoutput. It isa

combination of the numericand text

outputcharacters.The DV-1000

usesasimple principleto determine

what to displayin eachcharacter

location:

Anytextcharacterwhich has an

ASCII code equalto20 (hex)or

greater masks (blocks) the

numericdigitinthe samedisplay

position.That’sit. Thisworks on a

One of the first things you maywant todoinyoursetup programisfullymask all

numericaloutput, sowe beginwith a blankdisplay(unless you useACONboxesto

fill the entire display).Thisisanalogousto“starting withaclean slate”.Then all the

mainladderprogramhasto do iswritetextwhere desired,and unmask numerical

positionswhere numbersare desired.Perhapsthe bestcharacterto useisthe

spacecharacter,ASCII code 20 (hex).The displayhas64 characterpositions,

requiring 32 wordsof2020 hex.Forthe DL405 CPUs,usethe FILL instruction.For

the DL105,DL205 and DL350 CPUs,you can useasingle LDD instruction followed

by sixteen OUTD instructions.

NOTE:You mayrecall seeing the displayfilled withzero(0)characterswhen you

firstpowered up the DV-1000.Sincethe textdata unmasked all the numeric

locations, the numericoutput(all zeros)wasdisplayed.

Message DisplayMode

SP0LDA

O2000

Load octaladdress 2000 intothe accumulator.This

instruction automatically convertsthe address intoits

hexadecimalequivalent.

OUT

V7623

Output thisaddress toV7623, the location of the setup

parameterwhichisthe numericmessage pointer.

ParameterSetup:Numeric and TextData

LDA

O2100

Load octaladdress 2100 intothe accumulator.This

instruction automatically convertsthe address intoits

hexadecimalequivalent.

OUT

V7624

Output thisaddress toV7624, the location of the setup

parameterwhichisthe textmessage pointer.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK2(BCD)intothe accumulator.The

value “2”correspondstoMessage Mode asthe Power-up

DefaultMode.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK2toV7624, the location of the

Power-up Defaultsetup parameter.

If you are usingaDL405 type CPU,add the following laddersection tothe parameter

setup programabove.The FILL instruction isidealforthis situation.

K20

Load the constantK20 (hex)intothe accumulator.Thisis

equivalent to32(decimal), the numberofdatawordsinthe

textdata block.

LDA

O2100

Load octaladdress 2100 intothe accumulator.This

instruction automatically convertsthe address intoits

hexadecimalequivalent.

FILL

K2020

Fill 32 locations,starting atV2100,with 2020 (hex),which

isthe ASCII codesfortwospacecharacters.

Fill TextDataWithSpacesDL405 CPUs

If you are usingaDL105,DL205 orDL350 type CPU,add the following ladder

section tothe parametersetup programat the top of thispage.The FILL instruction

boxisnotavailablefortheseCPUs,sothe programusesone LDD boxand 16 OUTD

boxes.Rememberthat this section executesonlyon the firstscan (overall scan time

isnotaffected).

LDD

K20202020

Load fourASCII codes constantK20 (hex)intothe

accumulator.Thisproducesfourspacecharacters.

OUTD

V2100

Output the datatomemorylocationsV2100 and V2101.By

using the OUTD(OutDouble)instruction,wecan load two

V-memorywordlocationswith one instruction.

OUTD

V2102

Fill TextDataBlock WithSpaces

Output the datatomemorylocationsV2102 and V2103.

OUTD

V2136

Output the datatomemorylocationsV2136 and V2137.

Thisisthe lastof32 OUTDboxinstructionsinthisgroup

which programsall 64 display characterstobespaces.

InsertOUTDboxinstructionshereformemorylocations

V2104 toV2134.Remember,onlyuse even-numbered

memorylocations!

DL105/DL205/

DL350 CPUs

ParameterSetup

Program#2

Message DisplayMode

The setup programon the previouspage masks all numericpositionsasastarting

point. Now we add the mainladderprogram.Itloadsthe number,and then unmasks

the corresponding specificnumericdisplaypositions.

Asan example,let’splace a numberinthe

firstnumericposition thatvariesfrom0to

999.However, the V-memory contentswill

varyfrom0000 to 0999.Wecan leavethe

leading0masked,and onlyunmask the

three digitswewant to display,as shown

tothe right. 7654321076543210

999

Now we’rereadytowritethe mainladderprogram,whichfollows.Itplaces“0999”in

the firstnumericdatalocation,and then unmasks the three displaypositionsof

interest. We usethe null character,ASCII code “00”, to unmask the numericoutput.

K999

Load the value “999”inthe accumulator.

OUT

V2000

Output the datatomemorylocation V2000.The actual

contentsofV2000 are“0999”.However, the nextinstruction

will leavethe leading “0”masked,and unmask the “999”.

LDD

K2000

Use a Load Double(LDD)to placethe ASCII codesfora

space“”characterfollowed bythree null charactersinto

the accumulator (rememberthe swap effect forLDD box).

OUTD

V2106

Output the datatomemorylocationsV2106 and V2107.

The OutDoubleinstruction updatestwotextpositionsat

atime(two datawords).

SP0

FirstScan

7654321076543210

31 33

135

36343230

252321

2 1

13 11

16 14

1517

5 12 13 14 154

Position Data TextV-Memory

0 20202100

1 20202101

2 20202102

3 20202103

4 20202104

5 20202105

6 20002106

7 00002107

10 2110 2020

11 20202111

12 20202112

13 20202113

14 20202114

15 20202115

16 00002116

17 00002117

20 20202120

21 20202121

22 20202122

23 20202123

24 20202124

25 20202125

26 20202126

27 20202127

30 20202130

31 20202131

32 20202132

33 20202133

34 20202134

35 20202135

36 20202136

37 20202137

Position NumberV-MemoryPosition Data TextV-Memory

0 09992000

1 00002001

2 00002002

3 00002003

4 00002004

5 00002005

6 00002006

7 00002007

10 2010 0000

11 00002011

12 00002012

13 00002013

14 00002014

15 00002015

16 00002016

17 00002017

NumericDisplay PositionsTextDisplay Positions

NumericDataTextData

16 17

0 6 7

Unmasking

NumericPositions

a:\msg6.prj

Message DisplayMode

Still using a blankdisplayasastarting

point, let’s createadisplayfeaturing both

textand numbers.Sincethereismore

flexibilityintextplacement, we plan the

displaylayoutaround using numeric

position #5 forthe content“123”.The

following programwritestextand numeric

mask charactersinthe sameway.

7654321076543210

P S I = 1 2 3

K123

Load the value “123”inthe accumulator.

OUT

V2005

Output the datatomemorylocation V2005.The actual

contentsofV2005 are“0123”.However, the lastinstruction

will leavethe leading “0”masked,and unmask the “999”.

LDD

K493d5053

Use a Load Double(LDD)to placethe ASCII codesforthe

characters“PSI=”intothe accumulator.Rememberthe

LDD instruction swapsthe textoutputpositions.

OUTD

V2112

Output the datatomemorylocationsV2112 and V2113.

The OutDoubleinstruction updatestwotextpositionsata

time(two datawords).

SP1

Always On

LDD

K2000

Use a Load Double(LDD)to placethe ASCII codesforone

space(masks leading 0)and three null characters

(unmasks “123”).

OUTD

V2114

Output the datatomemorylocationsV2114 and V2115.

The OutDoubleinstruction updatestwotextpositionsata

time(two datawords).

7654321076543210

31 33

135

36343230

252321

2 1

13 11

16 14

1517

12 13 14 15

Position Data TextV-Memory

0 20202100

1 20202101

2 20202102

3 20202103

4 20202104

5 20202105

6 20002106

7 00002107

10 2110 2020

11 20202111

12 50532112

13 493d2113

14 20002114

15 00002115

16 20202116

17 20202117

20 20202120

21 20202121

22 20202122

23 20202123

24 20202124

25 20202125

26 20202126

27 20202127

30 20202130

31 20202131

32 20202132

33 20202133

34 20202134

35 20202135

36 20202136

37 20202137

Position NumberV-MemoryPosition Data TextV-Memory

0 00002000

1 00002001

2 00002002

3 00002003

4 00002004

5 01232005

6 00002006

7 00002007

10 2010 0000

11 00002011

12 00002012

13 00002013

14 00002014

15 00002015

16 00002016

17 00002017

NumericDisplay PositionsTextDisplay Positions

NumericDataTextData

16 17

0 6 7

5 4

Placing Numbers

and TextTogether

a:\msg7.prj

Message DisplayMode

Using theASCII Constant (ACON)Instruction

The examples sofarinthis chapterhavecovered DV-1000 displaybasics.The Load

Double(LDD)instruction loadsASCII valuesintomemoryforonlyfourcharactersto

be displayed.Thismethod requireslooking up ASCII valuesfromatable(or

memorizing the table),and can potentiallyuse a lotofLDD and OUTD instructions.

Fortunately, the ACON instruction (ASCII Constant)providesan easier method of

textentry.The ACONboxisavailable on DL105,DL205 and DL350 CPUsand on

DL440 and DL450 CPUs(notavailableonDL430 CPUs).Using DirectSOFT,you

can type the characters you wantdirectlyinthe instruction box!Afterlearning the

LDD method and the ACONmethod,you can use eitherone orboth,based on

individualpreferencesand yourapplication.

NOTE:Inthe CPU, the basicACONfunction boxonlyacceptstwocharacters. If you

are using a Hand-heldProgrammerincreating ladderlogictorun the DV-1000

display,notethatitsACON instruction islimited totwocharacters.However,

DirectSOFT permits you to enterup tofortycharacters.DirectSOFT createsan

extended ACONboxforcharacterentry, then subdividesitintomultiple 2-character

ACONboxeswhen downloading the programtothe CPU.This section assumes you

are using DirectSOFT.

Using the ACONmethod of textentry

addsnew ladderelementsonto our

existing program.The figuretothe

rightshowsan outline of the program.

The setup parameter rung isfirst, as

described inChapter2.The main

programfollows,justaswe have been

creating main programexamplesin

this chapter.

Afterthe end of the main program (and

the End Coil),we add a Data Label

box.Itannouncesthe data boxwhich

follows,and allowsthe main program

toreferencethe data boxbythe label.

The ACON(ASCII Constant)box

followsasthe lastprogramelement.

MainProgram

DataLabel

ASCII Constant

Setup Parameters

END

The main programsection receivesa new instruction, too.The MOVMC(Move

MemoryCartridge)instruction readsthe ACONdata(the textdata)intoV-memory

spacesothe mainladderprogramcan useit. Notethat the MOVMCrequires

supporting datatobeloaded ontothe stack beforeitsuse.The following example

showshowthisprocess works.

Message DisplayMode

the ACON instruction.The example

displaytothe rightshows“Aline of text!”

asthe message on the firstline.Even

though thisis15 characters, the ACON

boxmustcontain an even numberof

characters(we’ll use 16).And, this

examplestill usesa blankdisplayasa

starting point(setup program#2).

7654321076543210

A l i n e o f t e x t !

Load the numberofdatalocations.Thiswill be the

numberofcharacterpairs,sowe use 8 becausethere

are16characterstotal.NOTE:The constantisa hex

number!

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

LDLBL

Use a Load Data Label(LDLBL)toread the ASCII data

fromthe Data Labelafterthe END coil.The “K1”inthis

instruction referencesthe constantK1inthe DLBL box.

MOVMC

V2100

Movethe dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,using

the abovethree boxes’datawhichison the stack.

So,itwill read 8 words,withzero offset, fromthe data

boxinstructionsafterData Labelnumber1(K1).

SP0

Main

Program

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.The entrymust

be an even numberofcharacters,withamaximumof

40 characters.Here,wetypeaspacecharacterafter

the !character, to have16characterstotal.

END

DLBL

ACON

Aline of text!

DataLabel

ACON Box

The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data area

containing ACONorNCONboxes.The reference

numberforthisarea is“1”,specified byK1.

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

spaces:1111

Werecommend using the ACONmethod wheneveryou need to putseveral

characterson the display.

NOTE:AppendixCcontains someworksheetsto useincreating yourown

messages.Itincludesaworksheet forloading ASCII codesindividuallyand another

worksheet forusing ACONboxes.

ACONExample

Program#1

a:\msg8.prj

Message DisplayMode

Afterusing the ACON instruction to placealine of texton the firstdisplayrow,we’re

readytocreate a full-displaymessage covering all four rows.The previousexample

used one 16-characterACONbox.Ifwe extend thismethod to generate a message

forthe entire display,we’ll need fourACONboxesinseparate datalabelareas.The

organization ofACONboxesto displaytextisasfollows:

7654321076543210

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb

cccccccccccccccc

dddddddddddddddd

ACON

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

ACON

bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb

ACON

cccccccccccccccc

ACON

dddddddddddddddd

You mayrecall that the ACON instruction box(using DirectSOFT)can acceptup to

40 characters.Although there aremanypossiblecombinations,atleast twoACON

boxesarerequired tofill the DV-1000’s64-characterdisplay.Totakemaximum

advantage of the ACONbox capacity,let’s create a displayusing just twoACON

instructions.Using equally-sized ACONboxes,each one contains32 characters

whichwill fill tworows,as shown below:

ACON

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb

ACON

ccccccccccccccccdddddddddddddddd

7654321076543210

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb

cccccccccccccccc

dddddddddddddddd

The textinthe 32-characterACONBoxeswrapsaround fromone rowto a second

rowon the display.Thismakes veryefficientuse of the ACON instruction.However,

you havetocarefully countcharactersand spaces sothe displayoutputdoeswhat

you wantit to do.

When writing yourown programs,usethe length ofACONtext thatbest fits your

application and isthe easiest foryou to use. Inthe interestofconserving space,most

of the examplesinthis chapterwhich useACONsusethe 32-characterversion.

However, the programs could have used twice asmany16-characterACONboxes

instead.

Choosing ACON

BoxTextLength

Message DisplayMode

The following ladderprogramoutlines showequivalent16-characterand

32-characterACONboxmethodsto generatethe same displayoutput. It assumes

the textdata block beginsatV2100,butyour memorymap maydiffer.

Row1

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2100

END

DLBL

ACON

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

DLBL

ACON

bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb

DLBL

ACON

cccccccccccccccc

ACON

dddddddddddddddd

DLBL

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2100

END

DLBL

ACON

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb

DLBL

ACON

ccccccccccccccccdddddddddddddddd

Row2

Row3

Row4

Row1 and 2

Row3 and 4

MOVMCforDLBL1MOVMCforDLBL1

MOVMCforDLBL2

(movesrow2 datatoV2110)

MOVMCforDLBL3

(movesrow3 datatoV2120)

MOVMCforDLBL4

(movesrow4 datatoV2130)

MOVMCforDLBL2

(movesrow3 datatoV2120)

16--CharacterACONs32-CharacterACONs

(K10 hex=

16 decimal)

Message DisplayMode

ACONmethod of textentryincreating

displaytothe right. It showsthe machine

numberand status, followed bya part

countand production ratein partsper

hour.Remember, the numericlocationsof

“1234”and “57” mustbe unmasked inthe

7654321076543210

MACHINE NO.5

S T A T U S = R U N

Part count= 1234

Parts/hour= 57

Also,becausethe ACONtextcoversthe entire display, thereisno need towrite

spacesto all characterpositionstocreateablank starting display.Therefore,wecan

usethe simplerSetup Program#1 thatjustsetsup the numericand textdata blocks.

ACONboxes can containamaximumof40 characters.The DV-1000 display

contains64 characters,sowe arbitrarilyusetwo equally-sized ACONboxes,at32

characterseach. Insertspacesforblankdisplaylocations,counting themprecisely.

SDataforthe firstACONbox contains

the top twolinesofdisplaytext, and

beginsatV2100.

SDataforthe second ACONbox

containsthe bottomtwolinesof

displaytext, and beginsatV2120.

ACON

MACHINENO.5STATUS=RUN

ACON

Partcount=Parts/hour=

spaces:55

spaces:41 1 1 4

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 0

7 6 5 4 0 3 2 1 0

26 27

2 1

13 11

1517

Position Data TextV-Memory

0 4D41 M2100

1 4348 C2101

2 494EI2102

3 4520 E2103

4 4E4F N2104

5 2E35 .2105

6 20202106

7 20202107

10 2110 5354 S

11 4154 A2111

12 5553 U2112

13 203D2113

14 20522114

15 554EU2115

16 20202116

17 20202117

20 5061 P2120

21 7274 r2121

22 20632122

23 6F75 o2123

24 6E74 n2124

25 3D20 =2125

26 00002126

27 00002127

30 5061 P2130

31 7274 r2131

32 732F s2132

33 686F h2133

34 7572 u2134

35 3D20 =2135

36 20202136

37 00002137

Position NumberV-MemoryPosition Data TextV-Memory

0 00002000

1 00002001

2 00002002

3 00002003

4 00002004

5 00002005

6 00002006

7 00002007

10 2010 1234

11 00002011

12 00002012

13 00002013

14 00572014

15 00002015

16 00002016

17 00002017

NumericDataTextData

16 17

0 6 7

5 4

2 1

10 11

3 2

7 6

5 4

ACON Box1dataACON Box2data

The following programplacesnumericand textdataintothe locations shown above.

ACONExample

Program#2

Message DisplayMode

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

K1234

Load the number “1234”intothe accumulator.Your

programwouldread in datafroman analog input

moduleforthis step,etc.

OUT

V2010

Place“1234”inthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 10.

K57

Load the number “57”intothe accumulator.

OUT

V2014

SP1

LoadValues IntoNumericDataBlock

Place“57”inthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 14.

Always On

K10

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16

words(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

MOVMC

V2100

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

SP0

Move ACON DataInto TextDataBlock

K10

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16

words(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

MOVMC

V2120

Movethe dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the

display.

FirstScan

END The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

LDD

Load the constantzero(ASCII null character) into

the accumulator.

OUTD

V2126

Placezerosintextoutputposition 26 and 27.This

unmasks numericposition 10.

LDD

K2020

Use a Load Doubleto update4characterspaces.

The K2020 actuallyimpliesK00002020.The zeros

unmask the numeric“57”,and the spaces(2020)

hide itsleading zeros.

SP0

Unmask NumericLocations

OUTD

V2136 Placezerosintextoutputposition 36,and spaces

in outputposition 37.

FirstScan

a:\msg9.prj

Message DisplayMode

UseASCII Constant(ACON)boxesto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

DLBL

ACON

MACHINENO.5STATUS=RUN

DataforTop 2Display Lines

The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data

area containing ACONorNCONboxes.The

reference numberforthisarea is“1”,specified by

K1.

DLBL

ACON

Partcount=Parts/hour=

DataforBottom2Display Lines

UseASCII Constant(ACON)boxesto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

spaces:5 5

spaces:44 11 1

(continued)

a:\msg9.prj

Message DisplayMode

MessageDisplay Applications and Techniques

The material inthis chapterup tothispointhasdemonstrated basicproceduresin

getting information tothe display.The following examplesbuild on thisfoundation,

showing solutionstotypicalapplications.These programsarethe “bellsand

whistles”of the displayfunction. It’sa good idea to get the basicdisplay screen

working first, and then carefullyadd portionsof thesetechniquestofine-tune your

application program.The specialdisplayapplicationswewill coverare:

SMultiplemessage displays

SBlinking text

SDynamictext

SEmbedding the time and dateinamessage

SPolarity sign fornumbers

SBarGraph Displays

SAutomaticScrolling Displays

InMessage Mode, the DV-1000 continuously scansthe numericand textdatain

V-memorytocombine theirinformation and createasingle display screen.To

change the displaymessage,wemustupdatethe numericand/ortextdata blocks in

V-memoryaccordingly. It’spossibleto alternate between two or more display

screens,based on some arbitraryevent. Forexample,supposewewanteitherof the

following display screensto appear,based on an operatorinput:

7654321076543210

TOTAL PRODUCTION

Line 1=11111111

Line 2=22222222

Line 3=33333333

7654321076543210

CONVEYOR SPEEDS

L i n e 1 = 1 2 3 f p m

L i n e 2 = 4 5 6 f p m

L i n e 3 = 7 8 9 f p m

Display Screen1Display Screen2

In ordertochooseaprogramming strategy,wemustdo the following:

SChoose numberofdisplay screens

SCreatethe message (numericand text)data

SDecide whatevent triggersdisplay screen changes

Inthisexample,we have 2 display screens, the contentsare as shown,and the

displaywill change based on the state ofX0(OFF =Display1, ON=Display2).An

inputsimulatororsimpleswitchisusefulforcreating switchX0.Sincemostof the

display charactersinthe two display screensare different, wewill useACONsto

move datain and outof the textand numerictables.The ladderprogramwill need to

updatethe textcharactersonce aftereach display screen change,becausethey

remainfixed thereafter.The one-shot(positive differential)function boxwill help us

write newdisplaydatajustonce.However, the numericdatamustbe constantly

updated,becauseitchangesinrealtimewiththe user machine orprocess. Inthis

case,wewill repeat the update eachPLCscan.

NOTE:If using DL105,be suretoinitializethe CPUorinputX0will notactivate.

FromPLCmenu,chooseSetup, then InitializeScratchpad.

MultipleMessage

Displays

Message DisplayMode

(

)

SP0

Load the timervalue (whichismapped tolocation V0

and V1)intothe accumulator.Herewe onlyuse 16 bits

of the timervalue.

OUT

V2005

Placethe numberinthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 5.

OUT

V2011

OUT

V2015

LoadValues IntoNumericDataBlock

TMRAF

K99999999

Useatimer (fastaccumulating type)to generate a

changing number.Yourapplication will haveitsown

sourcesfor real-time process data,sothisrung will be

different. Notethat thisisa 32-bit timer.

OUTD

V2004

OUTD

V2010

OUTD

V2014

PDActivatecontrolrelayC0for1scan when X0 goesfro

OntoOff.

K10

LDLBL

SP0X0

LDD

PDActivatecontrolrelayC1for1scan when X0 goesfro

Off toOn.

LoadScreen1Datainto TextDataBlock

MOVMC

V2100

Placethe numberinthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 11.

Placethe numberinthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 15.

X0Off =Screen1

X0On=Screen2

Load the timervalue (whichismapped tolocation V0

and V1)intothe accumulator.Herewe use all 32 bits

of the timervalue.

Placethe numberinthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 4.

Placethe numberinthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 10.

Placethe numberinthe numericdata block location

corresponding to numericdisplayposition 14.

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

Note:

a:\msg10.prj

Message DisplayMode

OUTD

V2114

OUTD

V2124

OUTD

V2134

K10

LDLBL

SP0X0

LDD

MOVMC

V2100

Load the accumulatorwithASCII codesfornull

characters(zeros), to unmask numericdisplay

positions.

Unmask textdisplaypositions14 and 15.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

OUTD

V2114

OUTD

V2116

LDD

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

LoadScreen2Datainto TextDataBlock

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the display.

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK3.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK4.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the display.

Unmask textdisplaypositions24 and 25.

Unmask textdisplaypositions34 and 35.

Load the accumulatorwithASCII codesfornull

characters(zeros), to unmask numericdisplay

positions.

Unmask textdisplaypositions14 and 15.

Unmask textdisplaypositions16 and 17.

(continued)

a:\msg10.prj

Message DisplayMode

END PlaceanEND coil heretomarkthe end of the

main program.Following thisarethe ACON

boxes containing screen data.

DLBL

ACON

CONVEYORSPEEDSLine 1=fpm

Screen1,Top 2Lines The Data Labelboxreferenced byK1 preceeds

the following ACONbox.

DLBL

ACON

Bottom2Lines

DLBL

ACON

TOTALPRODUCTIONLine 1=

Screen2,Top 2Lines

DLBL

ACON

Line 2=Line 3=

Bottom2Lines

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

OUTD

V2124

OUTD

V2126

OUTD

V2134

OUTD

V2136

Unmask textdisplaypositions24 and 25.

Unmask textdisplaypositions26 and 27.

Unmask textdisplaypositions34 and 35.

Unmask textdisplaypositions36 and 37.

SAME

Line 2=fpmLine 3=fpm

spaces:1 2 1 5

spaces:1 5 1 1 5

spaces:1 1 1 8

spaces:1 8 1 8

(continued)

a:\msg10.prj

Message DisplayMode

Insome display screensit’sdesirabletochange onlyakeyword ortwo upon certain

events,leaving mostof the textintact. Wemightcall thisa“forms”type screen.The

unchanging textisthe form,and the dynamictextoccupiesblanks withinthe form. In

thisexample, the display screen reportsthe statusofamachine.The operational

Manualand Automaticmodesappearas“MAN”,and “AUTO”,asinthese displays:

7654321076543210

M A C H I N E S T A T U S :

M O D E = A U T O

7654321076543210

MACHINE STATUS:

MODE= M A N

X0=Off X0=On

Now wecan decide howtowritethe

dynamictextladderprogram.We’ll use

the ACONtextentrymethod forthe basic

form of the screen,whichwill include

“MACHINE STATUSMODE=”.The

dynamictextwill occupytextpositions14

and 15.7654321076543210

31 33

61357

36343230

2321

DynamicTextDisplay Positions

1514

The dynamictextwill followthe state of the inputswitchcontactX0.When X0=Off,

“MAN”will be displayed.When X0=On,“AUTO”will be displayed.The following

ladderlogicoutputsthesescreens.

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

Load FormTextData

K10

LDLBL

SP0

MOVMC

V2100

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

Note:Ifusing DL105 be sureCPUisinitialized

tomake inputsX0 and X1operational.

DynamicText

a:\msg11.prj

Message DisplayMode

K4d41

OUT

V2114

K4e20

SP0X0

OUT

V2115

Load the ASCII codesfor “MA”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

14.

Load the ASCII codesfor “N”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

15.

OUT

V2114

K544f

SP0X0

OUT

V2115

Load the ASCII codesfor “AU”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

14.

Load the ASCII codesfor “TO”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

15.

DLBL

ACON

MACHINE STATUS:MODE=

Screen FormDataThe Data Labelboxreferenced byK1,preceeds

the following ACONbox.

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

END AnEND coil marks the end of the main program.

K4155

DLBL

ACONThisACONbox contains32 space characters.

Besuretocarefully count the spacestomatch

the display.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC0for1scan when X0

goesfromOntoOff.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC1for1scan when X0

goesfromOff toOn.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16

words(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. Fornearlyevery

MOVMCused forACONdata, therewill be zero

offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the

display.

spaces:32

spaces:1 3 9

(continued)

a:\msg11.prj

Message DisplayMode

Undercertainconditions such asalarm orfaultreporting you maywant toimplement

blinking (orflashing)text. Building on the previousexample,we add an ALARMS

category. If there are no alarms, the text field afterthe word“ALARMS”isblank. If

thereisan alarm condition such asa partjam, the word”JAM” will appearinthe text

field and blinkata1Hzrate.

7654321076543210

M A C H I N E S T A T U S

M O D E = A U T O

ALARMS= J A M

7654321076543210

MACHINE STATUS

M O D E = M A N

ALARMS=

X0=Off,X1=Off X0=On,X1=On

Now wecan decide howtowritethe

blinking textladderprogram.We’ll use

the ACONtextentrymethod forthe basic

form of the screen,whichwill include

“MACHINE STATUS,MODE=”,and

“ALARMS=”.The blinking textwill occupy

textpositions25 and 26.7654321076543210

31 33

61357

36343230

10 16

2321

Blinking TextDisplay Positions

1514

2625

The following programbuildson the dynamictextexample. It uses specialrelay

SP4,which alternatesbetween On and Off ata 1 Hzratetocreatethe blinking effect.

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

Load FormTextData

K10

LDLBL

SP0

MOVMC

V2100

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the display.

Top 2Lines

Bottom2Lines

Note:Ifusing DL105 be sureCPUisinitialized

tomake inputsX0 and X1operational.

Blinking Text

a:\msg12.prj

Message DisplayMode

K4D41

OUT

V2114

K4E20

SP0X0

OUT

V2115

Load the ASCII codesfor “MA”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

14.

Load the ASCII codesfor “N”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

15.

K4155

OUT

V2114

K544f

SP0X0

OUT

V2115

Load the ASCII codesfor “AU”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition

14.

Load the ASCII codesfor “TO”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block location

corresponding totextdisplayposition 15.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC0for1scan when X0

goesfromOntoOff.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC1for1scan when X0

goesfromOff toOn.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC2for1scan when X1

goesfromOntoOff, orwhen X1ison and SP4

goesfromOntoOff.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC3for1scan when X1is

on and SP4 goesfromOff toOn.

K2020

OUT

V2125

SP0X1

OUT

V2126

Load the ASCII codesforspaces,in orderto

blankthe text thatblinks.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition 25.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition 26.

K4a41

OUT

V2125

K4d20

SP0X1

OUT

V2126

Load the ASCII codesfor “JA”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block

location corresponding totextdisplayposition 25.

Load the ASCII codesfor “M”.

Placethe ASCII codesinthe textdata block location

corresponding totextdisplayposition 26.

SP4

X1SP4

BlinkOff

BlinkOn

Manual

Auto

SP4=1Hz

(continued)

a:\msg12.prj

Message DisplayMode

DLBL

ACON

MACHINE STATUS:MODE=

Screen FormDataThe Data Labelboxreferenced byK1,preceeds

the following ACONbox.

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

END PlaceanEND coil,marking the end of the main

program.

ACON

ALARMS=

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

DLBL

spaces:23

spaces:1 3 1 9

(continued)

a:\msg12.prj

Message DisplayMode

Withthe DV-1000 you can use plus(+)or minus(--) characterstoindicatethe

algebraic sign ofnumericoutput. Tocoordinate numericand textoutput, the ladder

program mustexamine the sign bit forthe value and then select the appropriate

polarity sign fordisplaypurposes.Sign bitsoften occurwith bipolarinputsoroutputs

with analog modules,asinthe following example.

inputmoduleinstallation. Its

inputwordmapstoV40400.

However, the inputwordis

shared among fourchannelsof

the analog module. Onlyone

channel isactive on eachscan.

Ladderlogicdecodesthe active

channelbits,and storeseach

channel’sdataseparately.

Inthisfashion,one channel’s

dataisupdated eachscan .We

attachtothisprocess the task of

re--writing thatchannel’spolarity

sign inthe textoutput.

16pt

Input

Analog Module

V40400

X17

MSB LSB

DataBits

Active

Sign Bit

Inthisexample,numericdisplay

positions0,4,10,and 14 showthe value

foreach of the fourchannels.The

remainderof the displayarea istext

output, including the (+)and (--)

characters.

7654321076543210

A n a l o g C h 1 +3 2 9 3

I n p u t s C h 2 -2 4 1 8

C h 3 +1 6 4 4

C h 4 -5 7 6 5

The textdisplayis created using twoACONboxinstructions.Then,ladderlogic

unmasks the eight textlocations corresponding tothe fournumericpositionsby

writing null characters.Then activechannelbitsX14 and X15 are examined and the

appropriate polarity characteriswritten totextpositions5,15,25,and 35.

respectively.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 0

7 6 5 4 0 3 2 1 0

26 27

2 1

13 11

1517

NumericDisplay PositionsTextDisplay Positions

16 17

6 7

5 4

2 1

10 11

3 2

7 6

5 4

NOTE:Thisprogramexampleiswritten forthe systemwiththe analog moduleinslot

0.Ifyou want to use a 16-pointinputsimulatorinstead,itwill alsowork.

The following ladderprogramexamplecreatesthe displayofsigned numbers. It is

written forthe PLCsystemshown above.

PolaritySign for

NumericOutput

Message DisplayMode

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

Load FormTextData

K10

LDLBL

SP0

MOVMC

V2100

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the display.

Top 2Lines

Bottom2Lines

LDD

OUTD

V2106

OUTD

V2116

OUTD

V2126

OUTD

V2136

Load zerosforthe null ASCII character, for

unmasking numericoutputon the display.

Unmask textpositions6 and 7,corresponding to

numericoutputposition 0.

Unmask textpositions16 and 17,corresponding to

numericoutputposition 4.

Unmask textpositions26 and 27,corresponding to

numericoutputposition 10.

Unmask textpositions36 and 37,corresponding to

numericoutputposition 14.

Unmask

NumericOutput

K202b

Load the ASCII codesforaspaceandaplussign

when the sign bitisnotset.

ReadSign Bit,

Create+/-- Sign

VX0

X17

Load the inputwordfromV-memory corresponding to

YinputsY0toY17.

Mask off the upperfourbits,preserving the analog

value represented bythe lower12 bitsof the data

word.

ANDD

Kfff

BCD Convert the 12-bitbinary value toa4-digitBCD

number (range is0to 4095,notcounting the sign bit).

Ch1

K202d

Load the ASCII codesforaspaceandaminussign

when the sign bitis set.

X17

SP1

LoadAnalog InputWord

a:\msg13.prj

Message DisplayMode

OUT

V2000

X15 Channel1 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 and X14 are

off. The Outinstruction movesthe datafromthe

accumulatortoV2000,numericdisplayposition 1.

X14

Movethe ASCII dataforthe algebraic sign fromthe

stack intothe accumulator.

POP

OUT

V2105

Placethe accumulatorcontents(algebraic sign in

ASCII code)intothe textdisplayposition 5, for

channel1.

END PlaceanEND coil,marking the end of the main

program.

DLBL

ACON

Analog Ch1 InputsCh2

Screen TextDataThe Data Labelboxreferenced byK1,preceeds

the following ACONbox.

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

DLBL

ACON

Ch3 Ch4

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

The Data Labelboxreferenced byK1,preceeds

the following ACONbox.

Ch2

Ch3

Ch4

Ch1

OUT

V2004

X15 Channel2 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 isoff and X14

ison.The Outinstruction movesthe datafromthe

accumulatortoV2004,numericdisplayposition 4.

X14

Movethe ASCII dataforthe algebraic sign fromthe

stack intothe accumulator.

POP

OUT

V2115

Placethe accumulatorcontents(algebraic sign in

ASCII code)intothe textdisplayposition 15, for

channel2.

OUT

V2010

X15 Channel3 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 ison and X14

isoff. The Outinstruction movesthe datafromthe

accumulatortoV2010,numericdisplayposition 10.

X14

Movethe ASCII dataforthe algebraic sign fromthe

stack intothe accumulator.

POP

OUT

V2125

Placethe accumulatorcontents(algebraic sign in

ASCII code)intothe textdisplayposition 5, for

channel3.

OUT

V2014

X15 Channel4 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 and X14 are

on.The Outinstruction movesthe datafromthe

accumulatortoV2014,numericdisplayposition 14.

X14

Movethe ASCII dataforthe algebraic sign fromthe

stack intothe accumulator.

POP

OUT

V2135

Placethe accumulatorcontents(algebraic sign in

ASCII code)intothe textdisplayposition 35, for

channel4.

spaces:1 6 6

7 13spaces:6

(continued)

a:\msg13.prj

Message DisplayMode

Insome applications you maywant to embed time and dateinformation in a

message displayoutput. The DL240,DL250,DL350,DL440 and DL450 CPUshave

built-inreal-timeclocks. Inatypicalapplication, the time and date are displayed

when a systemfaultoccurs,along withthe fault type.The example programinthis

section shows you howtocreatethe displayoutputbelow. Onthe left, the display

showsa basictext form without the faultcondition.When the particularfault“Bin

Empty”occurs, the displayfillsinthe fault, time,and datefieldsinthe form,shown on

the right.

NormalDisplay,X0=Off

7654321076543210

MACHINE STATUS

F a u l t =

T i m e =

D a t e =

FaultDisplay,X0=On

7654321076543210

MACHINE STATUS

F a u l t = B i n E m p t y

Time =11:32:57AM

Date =07/05/95

The programusesacombination ofACONboxes,LD/OUTand LDD/OUTD

instructionstocreatethe textportion of the display.The sixnumericdisplaypositions

contain both numbersand text formatting characters such as”:”or “/”. Insome

cases, the numbershaveto be shifted to align themwiththe formatting characters.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 0

7 6 5 4 0 3 2 1 0

2 1

NumericDisplay PositionsTextDisplay Positions

16 17

6 7

5 4

2 1

10 11

3 2

7 6

5 4

26 27

36 37

The following diagramshowsthe state of the faultinputsignaland the resulting

displayactions. Ourexampleladderprogram monitorsthe state of the faultsignal

through discreteinputX0. Inthe Off-to-Ontransition, the ladderprogramwrites“Bin

Empty”,and fillsinthe time and date data.When inputX0makesthe On-to-Off

transition, the programerasesthe “BinEmpty” message and the time and date

information.Futuretransitionsof the X0signalcausethe same displayupdates.

OFF

Fault

Display

Updates

WRITE“BinEmpty”

WRITEtime and date

ERASE “BinEmpty”

ERASE time and date

WRITE

(same)

ERASE

(same)

Ateach displayupdate, the ladderprogramneedsonlytowritethe newtextoutput

datatothe textdata block one time.So, the programusesaPD(positive differential)

coil tosense bothOff-to-On and On-to-Off transitionsofX0.The controlrelays C0

and C1 areonforjustone scan,respectively. Inthiswaythe ladderprogramonlyhas

to displayupdateswhen the faultsignalX0makesatransition,greatlyminimizing

anyimpact tothe PLCscan time.

Embedded Time

and Date

(DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL440 and

DL450 CPUsOnly)

Message DisplayMode

Real-timeclock dataisavailableinsystemV-memory(DL240,DL250,DL350,

DL440 and DL450 CPUs),at the addressesinthe table below. If the current time and

dateinyourPLCrequires setting,useDirectSOFT’smenu “PLC”, then “Settings”,

then “Calendar”.

TimeDataLocation DateDataLocation

HoursV7770 DayV7772

MinutesV7767 MonthV7773

SecondsV7766 YearV7774

The following program reportsthe time and datewhen the errorinputX0turnson.

The display clearsthe information when X0turnsoff.

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2100

SP0

PDActivatecontrolrelayC0for1scan when X0 goesfrom

Off toOn.

PDActivatecontrolrelayC1for1scan when X0 goesfrom

OntoOff.

WriteBasicMessageForm

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top line on the display.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the display.

Top Line

Bottom2Lines

a:\msg14.prj

Message DisplayMode

LDD

K3d20

Load the ASCII codestwo null characters(0000),

followed bythe ASCII codesfor“=”.

OUTD

V2122

Placethe characters“=”tothe rightof“Time”,on the

thirdrowof the display,and unmask the twocharacter

positionsforthe hoursdigits.

LDD

K3a3a00

OUT

V2124

Placethe colonson the thirdline of the displayforthe

time output, and placethe null characters sothey

unmask the minutesdigits.

OUTUsecontrolrelay contactC2to extend the logicof this

rung tomorerungs, toAND withrelationalcontacts.

LDD

K3d20

Load the ASCII codesfortwo null characters(0000),

followed bythe ASCII codesfor“=”.

OUTD

V2132

LDD

K2f2f00

OUTD

V2134

LDD

K414d0000

If the hours value isless than 12, then load the ASCII

codesfor “AM”.The null characters(0000)unmasks

the minutesdigits.

OUTD

V2126

Placethe “AM”characterstothe rightof the time

displayon the thirdrow.

Load the ASCII codesforacolon, two null characters,

and anothercolon.

Placethe characters“=”tothe rightof“Date”,on the

fourthrowof the display,and unmask the two

characterpositionsforthe yearsdigits.

Load the ASCII codesfora“/”, two null characters,

and another “/”.

Placethe “/”characterson the fourthline of the

displayforthe date output, and placethe null

characters sotheyunmask the month digits.

LDD

K20200000

OUTD

V2136

Load the ASCII codesfortwospaces, followed bytwo

null characters.

Placethesecharacterson the fourthline.The null

charactersunmask the yeardigits,and the spaces

mask the last twocharacterpositions.

V7770 K12

LDD

K504d0000

OUTD

V2126

Hours,AMand PM

LDLBL

SP0X0

WriteFaultMessage

MOVMC

V2110

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis8words

(16 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK3.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2110,

corresponding tothe second line of the display.This

writesthe fault type tothe display.

C2V7770 K12 If the hours value is12 orgreater, then load the ASCII

codesfor “PM”.The null characters(0000)unmasks

the minutesdigits.

Placethe “PM”characterstothe rightof the time

displayon the thirdrow.

(continued)

a:\msg14.prj

Message DisplayMode

V7767

SHFL

Shift the minutesdigitsone digit(4 bits)tothe left in

the accumulator.

V7770

OUTD

V2012

C2V7770 K13 LD

V7770

Load the hours value fromthe real-timeclock source

inV-memoryintothe accumulator.

SUBD

K12

Subtract12 fromthe hours value.This converts

24-hourtimeto 12-hourtimeconvention.

OUTD

V2012

Placethe hoursdigitsinthe propernumericposition on

the thirdrow.

OUT

V2011

Placethe minutesdigitsinthe propernumericposition

on the thirdrow.

Load the minutes value fromthe real-timeclock

sourceinV-memoryintothe accumulator.

V7766

SHFL

Shift the secondsdigitstwo digits(8 bits)tothe left in

the accumulator.

OUT

V2010

Placethe secondsdigitsinthe propernumericposition

on the thirdrow.

Load the seconds value fromthe real-timeclock

sourceinV-memoryintothe accumulator.

V7773

Load the monthvalue fromthe real-timeclock source

inV-memoryintothe accumulator.

OUT

V2016

Placethe month digitsinthe propernumericposition

on the fourthrow.

V7772

SHFL

Shift the daydigitsone digit(4 bits)tothe left inthe

accumulator.

OUT

V2015

Placethe daydigitsinthe propernumericposition on

the fourthrow.

Load the day value fromthe real-timeclock sourcein

V-memoryintothe accumulator.

V7774

SHFL

Shift the yeardigitstwo digits(8 bits)tothe left inthe

accumulator.

OUT

V2014

Placethe yeardigitsinthe propernumericposition on

the fourthrow.

Load the yearvalue fromthe real-timeclock sourcein

V-memoryintothe accumulator.

Minutes

Seconds

Day

Month

Year

24-hrto12-hrClock

C2V7770 K13 Load the hours value fromthe real-timeclock source

inV-memoryintothe accumulator.

Placethe hoursdigitsinthe propernumericposition on

the thirdrow.

(continued)

a:\msg14.prj

Message DisplayMode

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

forthe top twolinesof the display.Itcontains32

characters,counting the spaces.

DLBL

ACON

MACHINE STATUSFault=

DataforTop 2Display Lines

DLBL

ACON

Time=Date=

DataforBottom2Display Lines

K20202020

OUT

V2113

OUTD

V2114

SP0X0

ClearFaultMessage

Load the ASCII codesfor4spacesintothe

accumulator.

Cleartextposition 13.

Cleartextpositions14 and 15.

OUTD

V2116

Cleartextpositions16 and 17.

OUT

V2123

OUTD

V2124

Cleartextposition 23.

Cleartextpositions24 and 25.

OUTD

V2126

Cleartextpositions26 and 27.

OUT

V2133

OUTD

V2134

Cleartextposition 33.

Cleartextpositions34 and 35.

OUTD

V2136

Cleartextpositions36 and 37.

END PlaceanEND coil,marking the end of the main

program.

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

forthe top twolinesof the display.Itcontains32

characters,counting the spaces.

DLBL

ACON

Fault=BinEmpty

DataforSecond Display Line

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

forthe second line of the display.Itcontains16

characters,counting the spaces.

spaces:1 2 10

spaces:10 10

spaces:1 1

1 1

(continued)

a:\msg14.prj

Message DisplayMode

bargraph using the DV-1000’sextended

ASCII characterset. The ASCII code FF

(hex)producesasolid block character.

The ladderprogramgeneratestextoutput

to displayarowof thesecharacterswhose

lengthisproportionalto a numericalvalue.

The remainderofeachrowconsistsof

spaces(20 hex).This createsthe bar

graph effect. 7654321076543210

minmax

analog inputmoduleinthe first

moduleslotinthe base. Itspoints

map toX0toX17,corresponding

to datawordV40400 in

V-memory. Itsinputwordis

shared among the fourchannels

of the analog module. Onlyone

channel isactive on eachscan.

Ladderlogicdecodesthe active

channelbits,and store each

channel’sdataseparately.

The bargraph displayupdateis

independent fromthe channel

value update process.

16pt

Input

Analog InputModule

V40400

V40403

X17

V40401

MSB LSB

DataBits

Active

The ladderprogramtocreatethisdisplayupdatesonlyone textposition (two

characters)perCPUscan.The following tablelistslocation ofanalog valuesand

pointersthe programusestokeep track ofwhereitisinthe overall displayupdate.

Sincethere are 64 characters(32 textpositions)inthe display, the programisableto

updatethe entire displayevery32 CPUscans.The programaddsapproximatelyfive

millisecondstothe scan time ofaDL240 CPU.

Variable Location Range ofvalues

RawAnalog valuesV2200 -- V2203 0000 -- FFFF

Processed Analog

Values

V2204 -- V2207 0001 -- 0010

CharacterPointerV2210 0 -- 15

RowPointerV2211 0 -- 3

RawAnalog PointerV2212 O2200 -- O2203

Processed Analog

Pointer

V2213 O2204 -- O2207

TextDataPointerV2214 O2100 -- O2137

Scratchpad numberV2215 --

BarGraph Example

(DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL440 and

DL450 CPUsOnly)

Message DisplayMode

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

LoadChannelDataValues

V40400

SP1Load the contentsofV40400 (X0toX17)intothe

accumulator.

OUT

V2210

OUT

V2211

LDA

O2200

OUT

V2212

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

Initializethe characterpointertozero.Thispointsto

one of16 characterson the currentrow.

Load the octaladdress 2200 intothe accumulator.

V2200 isthe location of the rawanalog data.

Initializethe rawanalog value pointeratV2212 to

point tothe firstanalog value atV2200.

SP0

Firstscan only

Initializethe rowpointertozero.Thispointsto one of

4rowsofcharacterson the display.

LDA

O2204

OUT

V2213

Load the octaladdress 2204 intothe accumulator.

V2204 isthe location of the processed analog data.

Initializethe rawanalog value pointeratV2213 to

point tothe firstanalog value atV2204.

LDA

O2100

OUT

V2214

Load the octaladdress 2100 intothe accumulator.

V2100 isthe beginning ofdisplaytextdata.

Initializethe displaytextpointeratV2214 to point to

the first textdisplaylocation atV2100.

InitializeVariables

Ch1

OUT

V2200

X15 Channel1 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 and X14 are

off. The Outinstruction placesthe datainV2200,

storing the rawdataforchannel1.

X14

Ch2

OUT

V2201

X15 Channel2 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 isoff and X14

ison.The Outinstruction placesthe datainV2201,

storing the rawdataforchannel2.

X14

Ch3

OUT

V2202

X15 Channel3 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 ison and X14

isoff. The Outinstruction placesthe datainV2202,

storing the rawdataforchannel3.

X14

Ch4

OUT

V2203

X15 Channel4 dataisbeing sentwhen X15 and and X14

are off. The Outinstruction placesthe datainV2203,

storing the rawdataforchannel4.

X14

a:\msg15.prj

Message DisplayMode

K31

ADD

V2211

Kff

V2210

K20

Load the ASCII constant for “1”intothe accumulator.

Wewill modifythiswith an offset tocreate numbers1

through 4.

Usethe rowdata asan offset forthe ASCII codes.

Thiswill numberthe displayasrows1through 4.

SHFL

OUT

V2215

INCB

V2210

If the processed analog value isless than the

characterpointer,load the ASCII code forthe solid

block character (bargraph component)intothe

accumulator.

If the processed analog value isequalto orgreater

than the characterpointer,load the ASCII code for

the spacecharacter (blanks bargraph)intothe

accumulator.

Movethe “ff”or “20”intothe second nibble of the

accumulator.

Savethe accumulatorcontentsatV2215 whilewe

calculatethe lowernibble.

SP1

WriteBarGraph Components

V2210 K0V2210 P2213

Increment the characterpointer,in ordertomakethe

nextcompare.

Kff

K20

If the processed analog value isless than the

characterpointer,load the ASCII code forthe solid

block character (bargraph component)intothe

accumulator.

If the processed analog value isequalto orgreater

than the characterpointer,load the ASCII code for

the spacecharacter (blanks bargraph)intothe

accumulator.

V2210 K0V2210 P2213

V2215

OUT

P2214

INCB

V2210

Combine the contentsof the accumulator (lower

nibble)withthe saved contentsofV2215 (upper

nibble).We haveaword nowreadytowrite.

Writethe bargraph word(2characters)tothe proper

textposition’saddress,pointed tobyV2214.

SP1

Increment the characterpointer,in ordertomakethe

nextcompare.

INCB

V2214

Increment the textdata pointer,in ordertowriteto

the next textposition on the display.

(continued)

a:\msg15.prj

Message DisplayMode

OUT

V2210

V2210 Load “0”intothe accumulator.

Reset the characterpointeratV2210 tozero.

K10

INCB

V2211

Increment the rowpointeratV2211.

P2212

Load the nextrawanalog value intothe accumulator

forprocessing.

ANDD

kfff

Mask off anybitsabovethe lower12 bits,such as

channelselectnumbers,etc.Thisasumes12-bit

analog values.

SHFR

Discardthe lower8 bits,and usethe upper4 bitsto

scalethe value from0to15(0tofhex).

OUT

P2213

Writethe processed analog value tothe proper

address,pointed tobyV2213.

INCB

P2213

Increment the processed analog value pointer.

INCB

V2212

Increment the rawanalog value pointer.

INCB

V2213

Add one tothe processed analog value, toscaleit

from1to16(1to 10 hex).

LDA

O2200

OUT

V2212

V2211 Load the beginning address of the rawanalog values

intothe accumulator.

Reset the rawanalog value pointeratV2212 to point

toV2200.

LDA

O2204

OUT

V2213

LDA

O2100

OUT

V2214

Load the constantzerointothe accumulator.

OUT

V2210

Reset the characterpointertozero.

OUT

V2211

Reset the rowpointertozero.

END PlaceanEND coil,marking the end of the program.

End ofDisplay

Load the beginning address of the processed analog

valuesintothe accumulator.

Reset the processed analog value pointeratV2213 to

point toV2204.

Load the beginning address of the textdata block into

the accumulator.

Reset the textdata pointeratV2214 to point to

V2100.

(continued)

a:\msg15.prj

Message DisplayMode

The DL240 CPUfeaturesfourbuilt-in

analog potentiometers. Inthisexamplewe

modifythe previousbargraph programto

read thesefourinputs.The

potentiometersare accessibleonthe front

bezel withasmall screwdriver.These

potentiometersmap directlyintosystem

V-memoryas8-bitnumbers,having a

resolution of1 partin 256.

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

RUN

TERM

RUN

CPU

PWR

BATT

PORT1

PORT2

DL240

CPU

Analog Pots

The ladderlogicprogramtakesthe range of0to 255 and re-scalesit to 0 to 15. Inthis

way, the numberofsegmentson eachrowcan varyfrom0to 15,in proportion tothe

potentiometeradjustment.

7654321076543210

Turn clockwiseto

increasevalue.

Max

CH1

CH2

MinMax

Display Output

CH3

CH4

PotentiometerAdjust

Tosee thisprogramwork,justload the filefromdisk,and placethe PLC inRun Mode.

BarGraph

Example,

DL240 Analog

Potentiometers

Message DisplayMode

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

OUT

V7640

OUT

V7642

LDA

V7644

OUT

V7646

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

Set the bottomofChannel1range tozero.

SP0

Firstscan only

K15

OUT

V7641

Load the constantK15 intothe accumulator.

LDA

V7643

OUT

V7645

SetUpAnalog PotentiometerScalings

OUT

V2210

OUT

V2211

LDA

O3774

OUT

V2212

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

Initializethe characterpointertozero.Thispointsto

one of16 characterson the currentrow.

Load the octaladdress 3774 intothe accumulator.

V3774 isthe location of the analog data.

Initializethe rawanalog value pointeratV2212 to

point tothe firstanalog value atV2200.

SP0

Firstscan only

Initializethe rowpointertozero.Thispointsto one of

4rowsofcharacterson the display.

LDA

O2204

OUT

V2213

Load the octaladdress 2204 intothe accumulator.

V2204 isthe location of the processed analog data.

Initializethe rawanalog value pointeratV2213 to

point tothe firstanalog value atV2204.

LDA

O2100

OUT

V2214

Load the octaladdress 2100 intothe accumulator.

V2100 isthe beginning ofdisplaytextdata.

Initializethe displaytextpointeratV2214 to point to

the first textdisplaylocation atV2100.

InitializeVariables OUT

V7647

Set the bottomofChannel2range tozero.

Set the bottomofChannel3range tozero.

Set the bottomofChannel4range tozero.

Set the top ofChannel1range to 15.

Set the top ofChannel2range to 15.

Set the top ofChannel3range to 15.

Set the top ofChannel4range to 15.

a:\msg16.prj

Message DisplayMode

K31

ADD

V2211

Kff

V2210

K20

Load the ASCII constant for “1”intothe accumulator.

Wewill modifythiswith an offset tocreate numbers1

through 4.

Usethe rowdata asan offset forthe ASCII codes.

Thiswill numberthe displayasrows1through 4.

SHFL

OUT

V2215

INCB

V2210

If the processed analog value isless than the

characterpointer,load the ASCII code forthe solid

block character (bargraph component)intothe

accumulator.

If the processed analog value isequalto orgreater

than the characterpointer,load the ASCII code for

the spacecharacter (blanks bargraph)intothe

accumulator.

Movethe “ff”or “20”intothe second nibble of the

accumulator.

Savethe accumulatorcontentsatV2215 whilewe

calculatethe lowernibble.

SP1

WriteBarGraph Components

V2210 K0V2210 P2213

Increment the characterpointer,in ordertomakethe

nextcompare.

Kff

K20

If the processed analog value isless than the

characterpointer,load the ASCII code forthe solid

block character (bargraph component)intothe

accumulator.

If the processed ananlog value isequalto orgreater

than the characterpointer,load the ASCII code for

the spacecharacter (blanks bargraph)intothe

accumulator.

V2210 P2213

V2215

OUT

P2214

INCB

V2210

Combine the contentsof the accumulator (lower

nibble)withthe saved contentsofV2215 (upper

nibble).We haveaword nowreadytowrite.

Writethe bargraph word(2characters)tothe proper

textposition’saddress,pointed tobyV2214.

SP1

Increment the characterpointer,in ordertomakethe

nextcompare.

INCB

V2214

Increment the textdata pointer,in ordertowriteto

the next textposition on the display.

(continued)

a:\msg16.prj

Message DisplayMode

OUT

V2210

V2210 Load “0”intothe accumulator.

Reset the characterpointeratV2210 tozero.

K10

INCB

V2211

Increment the rowpointeratV2211.

P2212

Load the nextrawanalog value intothe accumulator

forprocessing.

BINConvert the accumulatorcontentsto binary.

OUT

P2213

Writethe processed analog value tothe proper

address,pointed tobyV2213.

INCB

P2213

Increment the processed analog value pointer.

INCB

V2212

Increment the rawanalog value pointer.

INCB

V2213

Add one tothe processed analog value, toscaleit

from1to16(1to 10 hex).

LDA

O3774

OUT

V2212

V2211 Load the beginning address of the analog valuesinto

the accumulator.

Reset the rawanalog value pointeratV2212 to point

toV2200.

LDA

O2204

OUT

V2213

LDA

O2100

OUT

V2214

Load the constantzerointothe accumulator.

OUT

V2210

Reset the characterpointertozero.

OUT

V2211

Discardthe lower8 bits,and usethe upper4 bitsto

scalethe value from0to15(0tofhex).

END PlaceanEND coil,marking the end of the program.

End ofDisplay

Load the beginning address of the processed analog

valuesintothe accumulator.

Reset the processed analog value pointeratV2213 to

point toV2204.

Load the beginning address of the textdata block into

the accumulator.

Reset the textdata pointeratV2214 to point to

V2100.

(continued)

a:\msg16.prj

Message DisplayMode

Occasionally you maywant tomonitora

listofprocess parameterslargerthan the

DV-1000 display can showatone time.

Earlierinthis chaptera“dualdisplay”

exampleswitched between twosetsof

information. Inthisexample, the

automatic scrolling technique provides

hands-free monitoring ofmultiplescreens

ofinformation.

The list tothe rightcontains10 items,

followed bya blankline item.The example

programscrollsdownthe listone item

everytwoseconds,and startsagainwith

the firstitem.

Lot Number 3293

Setpoint 2418

A c t u a l T e m p 1 6 4 4

High Alarm 5765

L o w A l a r m 1 6 4 4

T a n k 1 L v l 5 7 6 5

T a n k 2 L v l 1 6 4 4

F l o w R a t e 5 7 6 5

T e m p 1 1 6 4 4

T e m p 2 8 2 1 9

The information to be displayed will

obviouslynot fitinthe standard numeric

and textdata blocks.Consequently,we

havetochoose a method ofmoving the

dataintothe standard data blocks.Refer

tothe memorymap tothe right.

Setup Parametersdefine the standard

numericblock (atV2000)and textdata

block (atV2100)asinthe otherexamples

inthis chapter.However,aseparate

numericlist(atV2040)and textlist(at

V2200)containsthe all information to be

scrolled through the display.Therefore,

the main program movesa different

portion of the listsintothe corresponding

data blocks everytwoseconds.Sincethe

DV-1000 constantlyre-readsthe data

blocks (pointed to bythe setup

parameters),itcompletesthe scrolling

effect.

V0000

V--MemorySpace

UserData

NumericPointer=2000

TextPointer=2100

V2000 NumericDataBlock

TextDataBlock

V7623

V7624

V2100

V2017

V2137

TextList

V2200

V2040 NumericList

Setup Parameters

Toscroll the displaymessage, the ladderprogramon the nextpage createsand

usesthe following variablestomanage the datainthe scrolling process.

Variable Location Range ofvalues

List ItemPointerV4000 0 toX

ItemPointerDuring Scroll V4001 Xto(X+3)

TextListAddress OffsetV4002 0 to40(hex)

TextListAddress PointerV4003 2200 to 3010 (octal)

NumericDataBlock Address PointerV4004 2000 to 2014 (octal)

NumericListAddress PointerV4005 2040 to(2040 +X) (octal)

ListLength(called “X”) V4006 1 to20(hex)

Automatic

Scrolling Display

(DL240,DL250,

DL350,DL440 and

DL450 CPUsOnly)

Message DisplayMode

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

K58

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2200

LDD

Load the constantK58 (hex)intothe accumulator.

Thisisthe numberofwords(88 decimal)we need to

movetocreatethe textdatalist. Counting the words

inthe ACONboxes,we have 20+20+20+20+8=88.

Load the constantK0intothe accumulaor.Thisisthe

offset forMOVMC,and isusually zero.

SP0

Firstscan only

OUT

V4000

OUTD

V2206

Initializethe itemnumber.

OUTD

V2216

OUTD

V2226

InitializeVariables

OUTD

V2236

Load the datalabelK1into he accumulator.The data

isafterthe labelK1.

Movethe datatothe V-memoryarea starting at

V2200.Thisinstruction usesthe three numbersfrom

the stack whichweloaded above.

Load the constantK0into all 32 bitsof the

accumulator.

Unmask the numericposition foritem1.

Unmask the numericposition foritem2.

Unmask the numericposition foritem3.

Unmask the numericposition foritem4.

OUTD

V2246

OUTD

V2256

OUTD

V2266

OUTD

V2276

OUTD

V2306

OUTD

V2316

OUT

V4006

Load the constantKb hex(or11 decimal)intothe

accumulator.

Set the listlength atV4006 to11items.

Unmask the numericposition foritem5.

Unmask the numericposition foritem6.

Unmask the numericposition foritem7.

Unmask the numericposition foritem8.

Unmask the numericposition foritem9.

Unmask the numericposition foritem10.

Move textdata

Unmask numeric

positions

SetUpScroll Timer

TMR

K20 T0

T0ConfigureTimer0 asatwo-second self-resetting

timer.

a:\msg17.prj

Message DisplayMode

V4001

SHFL

If C0ison,ascroll isin progress.Load the item

numberduringascroll intothe accumulator.

Multiplythe itemnumberbyeightby shifting itsbinary

formtothe left three digits.This createsan address

offset.

SP0

SET

LDA

O2100

Load the octaladdress forV2100 intothe

accumulator.

OUT

V4003

Set the textdata pointeratV4003 to point toV2100.

LDA

O2000

Load the octaladdress forV2000 intothe

accumulator.

OUT

V4004

Set the numericdata pointeratV4004 to point to

V2000.

V4000

Load the currentitempointerintothe accumulator.

OUT

V4001

Copythe listitempointerintoV4001, the itempointer

used during the scroll.

INCB

V4000

Increment the listitempointeratV4000.

V4000 V4006 LD

If the listitempointeratV4000 equalsthe listlength

atV4006,load zerointothe accumulator.

OUT

V4000

Set the listitempointeratV4000 tozero.

OUT

V4002

Placethe address offsetequalto eight timesthe item

pointerintothe textdata address offsetpointer

location atV4002.

Load the constantK8intothe accumulator,sincewe

need tomove8words(16 charactersper row).

LDA

O2200

Load the octaladdress forV2200 intothe

accumulator.Thisisthe base address of the source

dataforthe textASCII codes.

BCD Convert the numberinthe accumulatortoBCD

format.

SetC0 every2seconds.C0isactiveforfourscans

and isthen reset. ContactSP0 ensureswe update

the display starting withthe firstscan.

InitializeVariables forNewDisplay

Move DataforNthItem

BCD Convert the numberinthe accumulatortoBCD

format.

ADD

V4002

Add the base address inthe acumulatorwiththe

offsetinV4002, to get the completesource address

of the textdata.

Move TextData

MOV

P4003

BINConvert the BCD numberinthe accumulatorto

binaryformat.

Move eightwords(16 characters)fromthe source

address tothe destination address.

(continued)

a:\msg17.prj

Message DisplayMode

ADD

V4001

Add the listitemnumberduring the scroll atV4001 to

the accumulatorcontents.

LDA

O2040

Load the listitempointerintothe accumulator.This

createsasource address fornumericlistdata.

OUT

V4001

Placethe newly calculated numericlistsource

address pointerintoitslocation atV4005.

P4005

Load the numericlistdata pointed to byV4005 into

the accumulator.

OUT

P4004

Placethe dataintothe numericdata block destination

pointed to bythe address pointeratV4004.

V4003

Load the current textdata pointervalue intothe

accumulator.

ADDD

Increment the accumulatorcontentsby8.Thisadds

eight tothe textdata pointer.

OUT

V4003

Updatethe textdata pointerwiththe newly calculated

value.Thisisasource address.

V4004

Load the currentnumericdata block pointerintothe

accumulator.

Move Numeric

Data

IncrementText

Address

Pointer

Increment

Numeric

Address

Pointer

BCD Convert the numberinthe accumulatortoBCD

format.

BINConvert the BCD numberinthe accumulatorto

binaryformat.

BCD Convert the numberinthe accumulatortoBCD

format.

BINConvert the BCD numberinthe accumulatorto

binaryformat.

BCD Convert the numberinthe accumulatortoBCD

format.

BIN

OUT

V4005

V4001

OUT

V4001

Placethe converted value back intolocation V4001.

V4001

Load the listitemnumberatlocation V4001 intothe

accumulator.

BCD Convert the numberinthe accumulatortoBCD.

Load the listitemnumberatlocation V4001 intothe

accumulater.

Placethe converted value back intolocation V4001.

Convert the BCD numberinthe accumulatorto

binaryformat.

(continued)

a:\msg17.prj

Message DisplayMode

The next fourACONboxeshold 40

characters(20 words).The text they

contain arethe listcontents.Besureto

carefully count the spaces.

DLBL

ACON

LotNumberSetpointActualT

DataforVariableList

SAME

ACON

empHigh AlarmLowAlarm

ACON

Tank1 LvlTank2 LvlFlow Rat

ACON

eTemp 1 Temp 2

Hereweinclude somespacesat the

end of the list, sothat the blankline at

the end of the listhas16 spaces

(requires8words).

ACON

The datalabelK1marks the beginning of

the ACON(ASCII constant)boxeswhich

follow.

spaces:1 6 8 1

spaces:5 1 6 1 7

spaces:1 1 6 1 1 6 1

spaces:7 1 10 1 10

RST

Load the octaladdress forV2000 intothe

accumulator.

OUT

V4001

Set the listitemnumberduringascroll tozero.

V4001 V4006 LD

If the listitempointerduringascroll atV4001 is

equaltothe listlength atV4006,load the

constantzerointothe accumulator.

V4003 K460

LDA

O2000

Set the numericdata block pointeratV4004 to

the base destination address value forV2000.

OUT

V4004

END

If ascroll isin progress (C0ison)and the text

destination address atV4003 equalshexK460

(2140 octal), the displayupdateisdone.So,

resetC0.

PlaceanEND coil tomarkthe end of the main

program.

Check ifDisplay UpdateisComplete

OUT

V4004

Updatethe numericdata block pointerwith

the newly calculated value.Thisisa

destination address.

INCB

V4001

Increment the listitempointerduringascroll

byone.

BINConvert the BCD numberinthe accumulator

to binaryformat.

ADDD

Increment the accumulatorcontentsby4.This

addsfourtothe numericdata block pointer.

spaces:

(continued)

a:\msg17.prj

Message DisplayMode

Some process variableswill include a

fractionalpart thatyou maywant to display

byusing a decimalpoint. The example

screen tothe rightdisplays an oven

temperaturewitharesolution of tenthsofa

degree Fahrenheit.

7654321076543210

OvenTemp=6553.5F

The decimalpointoccupiesacharacterposition inthe middle of the number,

becauseseparate decimalpointsegmentsare notbuiltinto eachcharacterordigit

field.The ladderprogrambeginswith a binarynumberwhichcan varyfrom0toffff

hex,or0to 65535 decimal.The numberisan integer,butisactuallyten timeslarger

than the actualoven temperaturein degrees.This createsan implied decimalpoint

inthe location shown,sowecan displaytenthsofa degree.The ladderprogram

readsthe oven temperaturefromV2200, then convertsit toBCD and displays itin

the appropriate numericoutputdisplaypositions.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 0

7 6 5 4 0 3 2 1 0

26 27

13 11

1517

NumericDisplay PositionsTextDisplay Positions

16 17

6 7

5 4

2 1

10 11

3 2

7 6

5 4

The programusesACONboxesto generatetext for “OvenTemp”and the remaining

blank spaceonthe display.The decimalpointand the “F”characterarewritten

specificallytotextpositionsembedded with null characters(ASCII code =0)which

unmasks the digits.Shift and add instructions splitapart the number’sdigitsto place

themin numericdisplaypositions0 and 1,making roomforthe decimalpoint.

(Setup Parameter rung here)

SP0

Kffff

OUT

V2200

SP1

Load TemperatureValue

Load the ffff hex(representing 6553.5 decimal)asthe

oven temp. fordemo purposes. In actualapplications

thisnumberwill comefroman analog inputmodule.

Output the datatoV2200,wherethe programwill read

and convert thisnumber.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2100

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

Top 2Lines

SP0

WriteText

Embedded

DecimalPoint

a:\msg18.prj

Message DisplayMode

LDD

K3d00

Load ASCII codesfortwo null characters(0000),

followed by“=”and a null character.Remember, the

two pairsofcharacterpositions swap forLDD

instructions.

OUTD

V2104

Placethe characterstothe rightof“OvenTemp”on the

top row.Rememberthatnull charactersunmask their

corresponding numericpositions.

LDD

K46002e

OUTD

V2106

Placethesecharacterson the top line of the display.

The null charactersunmask numericoutputinthe

corresponding characterpositions.

V2200

Load the binarytemperaturevalue fromV2200 intothe

accumulator.

BCD

SHFR

OUT

V2001

Load the ASCII codesfora decimalpoint(period), two

null characters,and the “F”.Remember, the two pairs

ofcharacterpositions swap forLDD instructions.

Convert the value toBCD,leaving the resultinthe

accumulator.

Shift the bitstothe right8 places,representing two

BCD digits.Thisleavesthe three mostsignificant

digitsinthe accumulator.

Placethe three mostsignificantdigitsin numeric

position 1,located atV2001.

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 words

(10 hex),or32 characters.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(useK0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120,

corresponding tothe bottomtwolineson the display.

Bottom2

Lines

SP1

V2200

Load the binarytemperaturevalue fromV2200 intothe

accumulator.

BCD

SHFL

OUT

V2000

Convert the value toBCD,leaving the resultinthe

accumulator.

Shift the bitstothe left 8 places,representing twoBCD

digits.Thismovesthe twoleastsignificantdigitstothe

left two places.

Placethe twoleastsignificantdigitsin numeric

position 0,located atV2000.

GetTemp.

Value

(continued)

a:\msg18.prj

Message DisplayMode

Bottom2

Lines

SHFR

Shift the bitstothe right4 places,representing one

BCD digit. Thismovesthe leastsignificantdigitback

one digit tothe right, leaving roomfor “F”at the end.

ANDD

Kf0

Thisforcesall digitstothe left of the leastsignificant

digit tozero.

ADD

V2000

Now wecombine the isolated leastsignificantdigit

back withthe otherdigit. However,ithasbeen shifted

tothe right tomakeroomforthe decimalpoint.

OUT

V2000

Output the two LSDsto numericoutputposition 0.

Theyarespaced apartone digit, tomakeroomforthe

decimalpoint, and have been moved tothe left to

makeroomforthe “F”.

END PlaceanEND coil,marking the end of the main

program.

DLBL

ACON

OvenTemp

Screen TextDataThe Data Labelboxreferenced byK1,preceeds

the following ACONbox.

ThisACONbox contains32 characters.Besure

tocarefully count the spacestomatchthe

display.

DLBL

ACONThisACONbox contains32 spaces.Thesefill

the bottomtwolinesof the display.

The Data Labelboxreferenced byK2,preceeds

the following ACONbox.

spaces:24

32spaces:

NOTE:The resulting BCD numberinV2000 and V2001 isusefulonlyfordisplay

purposes.The actualnumericalvalue isnotvalidforuseinfurthercomputations

(refertothe originalvalue inV2200).

(continued)

a:\msg18.prj

Message DisplayMode

ChapterSummary

Now we havecovered howto useMessage DisplayMode tocommunicatethe

statusof the machine toitsoperator.

Wemay summarizesome of the keypointswe havelearned aboutgenerating

messagesinthis chapter:

SSystem Messageshave priorityoverUser Messages.

SUser Messages can contain numericalvalues,ortext.

SNumericand TextPositionsrepresentone 16-bitword ofinformation.

SNumericand Textoutputmaybe viewed simultaneouslyon the same

display.Textoutputhasmask and unmasking controlovernumeric

output.

STextis stored inV-memoryinthe form ofASCII codes.

SLadderprograms can load textdataviathe LD/OUT,LDD/OUTD,and

MOVMC/ACON instructions.

SLDD (Load Double)instructionsrequireyou toswap positionsof the

ASCII codesof the first twocharacterswiththe second twocharacters,

withrespect toleft-to-rightdisplayposition orientation.

SACONboxesisthe preferred method forcreating message data

wheneveryou havemorethan a dozen charactersto placetogetheron

the display.

Summaryof

Key Points

StatusDisplay Mode

In ThisChapter....

—Overview

—Selectingthe Address

—Selectingthe Data Type

—Usingthe Bookmark

—ChapterSummary

StatusDisplayMode

Overview

StatusDisplayMode allows you toviewV-memorydatainthe CPU.It requiresno

setup parametersorsupporting ladderlogic!Therefore,you can walkup to any

DL105,DL205,DL405 PLCorDL305 with a DL350 CPU,and connectaDV-1000 to

viewvariousCPUdatatypes.Thismakesthe DV-1000 a greatdebugging toolfor

machine startupsorfortroubleshooting inthe field.

V--MemorySpace

UserV-memory

READ

StatusDisplayMode isaccessible atanytime bypressing the StatusKey(unless

the keypad isinBitControlMode). It doesnotrequiresetup parameters,butyou may

selectitasthe defaultmode atpowerup (see Chapter3).The defaultdisplayupon

StatusDisplayMode entryis shown below.

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

LSBMSB

(X07) (X00)

Legend:=binary0

=binary1

DatatypeAddress

The left columnliststhe datatype (Xinthe example).The nextcolumnliststhe octal

address,and the data bitsareonthe right. Sothe top rowshowsthe statusof the

eightdiscreteinputsX00 through X07 inrealtime.Recall that there are8bitsina

byte,and two bytes (16 bits)inadataword!

StatusDisplay

Format

StatusDisplayMode

If you can switchthe inputatX0 on and off, do so and watchthe displayresponse.

Across the bottomof the screen faceplateisthe bitnumbering, fromLSB toMSB.

NOTE:The binarybitpatternsor4-digitwordvaluesinthese displays are arbitrary

examples.The bitpatternsorvalueson yourDV-1000 dependson the state ofyour

CPUprogramand process.

Datatypes such asPorVare displayed as4-digitBCD orhexadecimalnumbers.

Step tothe Vdatatype bypressing the Minus(--) Keytwice.

PRESS

LSDMSD

BCD orHexValueDatatypeAddress

7654321076543210

V 2 1 0 0 4 D 4 1

V 2 1 0 1 4 3 4 8

V 2 1 0 2 4 9 4 E

V 2 1 0 3 4 5 2 0

Nowreturntothe Xdatatype bypressing the Plus(+)keytwice.

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

The defaultdisplayaboveshowsfourbytes,or32 bitsofdata.You can vieweight

bytes,or64 bitsbypressing the EnterKey. Inthe example displaybelow, the top line

showsX00 through X07,and X10 through X17 directlybelow.Toreturnto 32-bit

displayformat, justpress the EnterKeyagain.

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 2 0

X 4 0

X 6 0

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

(selectsfourdatawords)

(selectsfourbytes)

Selecting Byteor

WordDisplays

StatusDisplayMode

Selecting theAddress

The defaultaddress of the top line statusis“00”The DV-1000 automaticallydisplays

consecutive addresseson the remaining three lines.Addressesforthe entire

displayis selected fromthe top line only.Therefore, the cursor remainson the top

line.Tochange the address,movethe cursortothe rightbypressing the Cursor

Rightkeyonce.The cursor movestothe 10’splace.

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

PRESS

Withthe cursoroverthe 10’splace,press the Plus(+)Keyfourtimes.Eachtimethe

address incrementsby10 (octal),until the display showsthe statusforX40 through

X77.

7654321076543210

X 4 0

X 5 0

X 6 0

X 7 0

PRESS

Toincrement the 100’splace,press the CursorLeft key,and then the Plus(+)Key.

Nowthe top line address changesfrom40 to 140,and consecutive addressesfollow.

Using thistechnique,you can selecthigh numbered addressesquickly.

7654321076543210

X 1 4 0

X 1 5 0

X 1 6 0

X 1 7 0

PRESS

NOTE:Sincethe bitpatternsdisplayatleast8 bitson eachrow, the unitsdigitof the

address isalways “0”.Therefore, the cursorcannotbe moved tothe unitsposition in

the address forediting.

StatusDisplayMode

Selecting theDataType

You can viewvariousV-memorydatatypesbyusing the Plus(+)and Minus(--) Keys

on the keypad.Beginning fromthe defaultdisplay,verifythat the cursorisoverthe

“X”.Then press the Plus(+)Keytoviewthe statusofYoutputbitsas shown below.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 5 4 3 2 0

Y 0 0

Y 1 0

Y 2 0

Y 3 0

PRESS

6 1

DatatypesX,Y, GX,C,SP,T,CT,

S,V,and Pare accessiblein a

circularlist, as showntothe right.

However,you may see one ortwo

fewerdatatypes,based on your

PLCtype.Pressing the Plus(+)

Keydisplays the nextdatatype in

the clockwisedirection.Pressing

the Minus(--) Keydisplays the

nextdatatype inthe

counter-clockwisedirection.

DatatypesVand Pare displayed

in hexadecimalformatratherthan

asdiscrete bits.Asan example,

let’s viewVtype data now.

Increment the displayfromYtype

toVtype bypressing the Minus

(--) Keythree times.

GXC

PRESSPRESS

7654321076543210

V 0 0 0 0 0

V 1 0 0 0 0

V 2 0 0 0 0

V 3 0 0 0 0

PRESS

(selectVtype)

Bydefault the displaybeginswithV0through V3.Now wecan change the address to

the location ofdatawewishtoview.The exampleselectsthe data atV2100.

7654321076543210

V 2 1 0 0 4 D 4 1

V 2 1 0 1 4 3 4 8

V 2 1 0 2 4 9 4 E

V 2 1 0 3 4 5 2 0

PRESS

(change address to 2100)

StatusDisplayMode

Using theBookmark

Asaconveniencethe StatusDisplayMode featuresa“bookmark”,oramemoryof

the datatype and address lastselected inStatusMode.Thispermits you tolater

returntoStatusDisplayMode,and usethe bookmarkto easilyrecall the lastdata

type and address location you wereviewing.

To demonstrate howthisworks,supposeyou areviewing the memory contentsat

V2100,as you were at the end of the previous section (selectV2100 at thistimeifyou

have notalreadydone so).Now,supposeyou need tocheck for messagesusing

Message Mode (Press the MessageKey).Afterviewing anymessage,wewant to

returntoStatusMode,displaying V2100 contents.To do this,press STATonceto

viewthe defaultX00 data.Then press STATa second timetoreturntothe

bookmark,and the data atV2100 immediatelyappearson the display!

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

V 2 1 0 0 4 D 4 1

V 2 1 0 1 4 3 4 8

V 2 1 0 2 4 9 4 E

V 2 1 0 3 4 5 2 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MACHINE STATUS

F a u l t = B i n E m p t y

Time =11:32:57AM

Date =07/05/95

7654321076543210

V 2 1 0 0 4 D 4 1

V 2 1 0 1 4 3 4 8

V 2 1 0 2 4 9 4 E

V 2 1 0 3 4 5 2 0

PRESS

EnterStatusModeAgainReturntoBookmark

The bookmark servesasa pointertothe previously viewed datatype and address in

StatusMode,asdepicted below.The bookmarkis setwhen you exitStatusDisplay

Mode,and itcan reference anyof the datatypesalong withvalid addresses.

GXC

PRESS

V2100

PRESS

(first time) (secondtime)

=Bookmark

(default)

Note:The bookmarkisresetduring

a powerloss tothe DV-1000.

StatusDisplayMode

ChapterSummary

Now we havecovered howto useStatusDisplayMode toviewV-memory contents.

Wemay summarizesome of the keypointswe havelearned aboutsetup

parametersinthis chapter:

SStatusMode requiresno setup parameters.

SFordiscrete bitdisplays,you can selectbyte orwordformatbytoggling

the EnterKey.

SThe cursor remainson the top line atall times.The addressesof the

three rowsbelowthe top line areconsecutivetothe top line address.

SDatatypesareselected fromacircularlistusing the Plus(+)and Minus

(--) Keys.

SAfterpowerup, the DV-1000 recordsthe variabletype and address you

wereviewing an timeyou exitStatusDisplayMode,saving itasa

bookmark.Afterusing other modesand returning toStatusDisplay

Mode,you can press the EnterKeytwicetoreturntothe variabletype

and address previously viewed.

SThe bookmarkisalways resetateach powerup.

Summaryof

Key Points

ChangePreset Mode

In ThisChapter....

—Overview

—Setup ParametersforChangePresetMode

—AccessingChangePresetVariables

—Pre-labeledTimerandCounterPresets

—User-titled Presets

—Combination TitlesExample

—ChangePresetPassword

—SpecialTopicsforChangePreset

—Operator’sGuidetoChangePresetMode

—ChapterSummary

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Overview

NOTE:DV-1000swhich have nothad firmware upgrade toversion 1.5will nothave

Timerand CounterPresetswhen usedwithDL130 and DL230 CPUs.

Change PresetMode allows you toviewV-memory contentsand change them

directlyfromthe DV-1000 keypad.We usethe word“preset”becauseitisnormally

associated with process controlparameters such astimerand counterpresets.

Historically,a“preset”isavalue accessibletothe operatorforadjusting whilethe

machine orprocess isoperating. Often implemented using thumb-wheelswitches,

one adjustsproductqualityand machine performance bymaking a seriesof typically

carefuland incrementalchangestocontrolparameters.

The DV-1000 Change PresetMode emulatesthe thumb-wheelaccess to adjustPLC

controlparameters.However, the term “preset” reallyincludesall ofUserV-memory,

notjust timersand counters.This conceptis soimportant, we emphasizeithere:

“ChangePreset”means“ChangeV-MemoryData”!

Change PresetMode allows you tomonitorand change V-memorydatafromthe

DV-1000 keypad.Refertothe figure below.The ladderprogramwritesthe setup

parametersinV-memory(usuallyon the firstscan).Thesecontain pointerstotitles

(textlabelsforthe data)and tothe dataitself. The DV-1000 readsthese and provides

access to edit the data.When the operatorusesChange PresetMode, the DV-1000

writesnewvaluestothe selected datainV-memory.Then the ladderprogram reads

the data(usuallyon every scan)and usesitasacontrolparameterforthe process.

V--MemorySpace

UserV-memory

Setup Parameters

TITLES

DATA

MainProgram

Setup Parameters

LadderProgram

WRITE

READ

“ChangePreset”

Defined

HowChange

PresetWorks

Change PresetMode

Change PresetMode presentsdata

thatyou can viewon the displayand

editwiththe keypad.The display

formatisrelativelyfixed.Showntothe

right, the titlefield on eachline

occupiesthe firsteightornine

characterpositions.All datais

presented inthe rightcolumn as

4-digitBCD numbers,representing a

16-bitword.7654321076543210

a b c d e f g h 0 0 0 0

TITLEFIELD DATA

FIELD

You may skipcreating yourowntitles

and use default titlesas showntothe

right. Withthe setup parametervalue

the DV-1000 will automaticallyusethe

V-memoryaddress forthe titles.

V 2 3 0 0 3 5 8 6

Titles(labels)accompanythe data,giving them

meaning foryourapplication.The title and datalists

maybe longerthan the display can showatone

time,but the lengthsare programmable and are

equal.7654321076543210

SetPoint 0352

SoakTime 0020

Hi Alarm 0375

Lo Alarm 0325

Three typesof titlesare availableinChange PresetMode,as shown below.

User--titled Presetsallowyou tocreateyourowntextlabelofup to eightcharactersin

length.The remaining Pre-titled Timerand Counterlabelsare“canned” (orfixed),

However, theyareconvenient to usewhen you need generictimerorcounterlabels.

M y T i t l e 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0

C O U N T E R 1 0 0 0 0

1.User-TitledV-MemoryPresets

(createyourowntext titles)

2.Pre-Titled TimerPresets

(usecanned Timer1toTimer99 list)

3.Pre-TitledCounterPresets

(usecanned Counter1toCounter99 list)

NOTE:The Pre-titled Timerand CounterPresetsonlylabelV-memorydata on the

DV-1000 display.Theydo notdirectly controlTimerand Counterboxparameters.

Also, the timerand counterpresetnumbering isin decimal,notin octal!

The availabilityand numberof titletypes varieswiththe CPUtype connected tothe

DV-1000.Refertotable belowforthe availabilityof featuresforyourparticularCPU.

FeatureDL130,DL230,

DL240

DL250,DL350

DL430,DL440

DL450

AvailableUser-titled Presets16 32

AvailablePre-labeledTimerPresetLabels99 99

AvailablePre-labeledCounterPresetLabels99 99

Title and Data

Fields

PresetTitleTypes

Available

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Setup ParametersforChangePreset Mode

discussing wherethe listsreside.

SPLCV-memory containsall the data

value lists,along withUserPreset

titles(inASCII code form).These

listsrequireladderprogramming,

and we provide example programsin

this chapterto helpyou do this.

STimertitlesand Countertitlesare

located inthe DV--1000,and cannot

be changed.Therefore,no

programming isrequired forthese.

The maximumnumberofUser-titled

Presetsis16 forDL130,DL230 and

DL240 CPUs,and 32 forDL250,DL350

and all DL405 CPUs.Amaximumof99

Timer--titled presetsand 99 Counter- titled

presetsare available on all systems.

USERPRESET

Titles

TIMERTitles

COUNTERTitles

V-Memory

Data

PLC

V-Memory

DV-1000

Firmware

V-memoryrequiresetup

parametersaswell as

ladderprogramming.The location of

setup parametersislisted inthe table on

the following page.

Setup parametersforChange Preset

Mode listsareasubsetof the DV-1000

setup parameters.Theyinclude both

pointerand block sizetypes.Pointers

specifythe beginning addressesofeach

list. Block sizesare a constant that

specifythe length ofeachlistpair.

SThe length of the titleslistand data

list foreachtitletype isalways the

same,sothe block sizespecifies

both.

SThe lengthsof the three typesof

listsmaybe equal,ordifferent.

NOTE:Eachlistmusthave atleastone

entry.You cannotuse zeroforanyof the

three block size(listlength)parameters.

PLC

V-Memory

USERPresetsUSERTitles

Vaaaa Vxxxx

Vyyyy

Vzzzz

TIMER Data

COUNTER Data

Pointers

Block

sizes

Setup Parameters

V7600 --

V7622

V7720 --

V7722

Vaaaa to

Vzzzz

K1,K2,K3

Location ofPreset

VariableLists

Pointerand

Block Sizes

Change PresetMode

The ladderprogram required tosetup the

DV-1000 forChange PresetMode is very

simple. Infact, the setup programneedsonlyto

executeonthe firstscan (usecontactSP0).The

thingsthatitmustdo are:

SSpecifythe location of the titlesand data.

SSpecifythe length of title and datalists.

SCreate a password(ordisableit)

SLoad textdataintothe area forusertitles,

ifUser-titled Presetsare used.

The first three of theseitemsare partof the setup

parameterlocation data.Laterinthis chapterwe

include severalexampleladderprograms.

MainProgram

Setup Program

LadderProgram

The following tableliststhe subsetof the DV-1000 setup parameterswhich pertain

onlytoChange PresetMode.

V-MemoryLocation Setup ParameterDescription

V7620 UserPresetDataPointer

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointer

V7622 UserPresetBlockSize

V7627 ChangePresetPassword

V7720 (DL130 andDL230 CPUsuseV7640)TitledTimerDataPointer

V7721 (DL130 andDL230 CPUsuseV7641)TitledCounterDataPointer

V7722,highbyte(DL130 andDL230 CPUsuse

Location V7642)

TitledTimerPresetBlockSize

V7722,lowbyte(DL130 andDL230 CPUsuse

Location V7642)

TitledCounterPresetBlockSize

The resultofprogramming thesesetup parametersis shown below.The listlengths

areindependentlyprogrammable,as shown.The Usertitlestextisalsoselectable.

abcdefgh 0000

TITLE

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

Data

Titles

OROR

Data

ChangePreset

Setup Program

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Asa beginning example,let’sprogramthe setup parametersforthe minimumlist

sizesand typesacceptabletothe the DV-1000.Theminimumlengthforeachtitle

listisonetitle each.

7654321076543210

TIMER 1 0000

TIMER

TITLES

DATA

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000

COUNTER

TITLES

DATA

7654321076543210

My Title 0000

USER

TITLES

DATA

Also,wecan selectdefaultusertitleswhichtell the DV-1000 to usethe V-memory

address forusertitlesinstead oflooking fortext. Thisisdone byusing “FFFF”forthe

Usertitle address pointer.Aworksheet form ofourChange Presetselections

follows:

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

(default) -- V2300 Timer1V2301 Counter1V2302

Finally,wemakesome defaultchoicesjust to getstarted.Wewill disablethe Change

Presetpasswordfornow(Change PresetPasswordis covered in detail furtherin

this chapter).And,we’ll choosethe Powerup DefaultMode tobeChange Preset.

PasswordPasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Disable 0000 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetselections can determine the setup parameters.The numbers

arein boldtextinthe following table.Notethat the UserPresetTitlesPointerwill

normallylistan octaladdress.However,we programitwith“FFFF”in ordertoselect

defaultusertitles.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2300 StartatV2300

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctalFFFF Usedefault title

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 0001 1title

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0001 ChangePreset

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 0000 Disabled

V7720*TimerDataPointerOctal2301 StartatV2301

V7721*CounterDataPointerOctal2302 StartatV2302

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 0101 one timer,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722..

Establishing the

Lists

Change PresetMode

Now we usethe information inthe setup parametertabletowritethe program.Be

sureto payattention tothe datatype (octalorBCD)ofeachinstruction thatloadsto

the accumulator.Thisexample onlyrequiresparametersetup (no main program

required).Load thisprogramintoyourCPU,and followthe discussion on the next

page tosee how itperformsthe worksheetchoices.

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.V2300 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

ParameterSetup:ChangePreset

Kffff

Load the hex constantFFFF intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7621

Output this constant toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK1(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constant1toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK0toV7627, the location of the

Change PresetPasswork.The value of0000 disablesit.

LDA

O2301

Load the octaladdress 2301 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2301 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2302 Load the octaladdress 2302 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K101 Load the constantK101 intothe accumulator

OUT

V7722

Output the constant101 toV7722, the location of the block

size bytesforTimerand Countertitled data.This selects

one each.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2302 toV7721, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK1toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0001

selectsChange PresetMode.

a:\preset1.prj

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Accessing ChangePresetVariables

If you haveloaded the example programinthe Setup Parameters section,we’re

readytosee how itwill perform foran operator.To enterChange PresetMode,press

ChangePreseton the keypad. If the setup parametersforChange PresetMode are

missing orincomplete,you will see the displaybelowon the left.

7654321076543210

* S E T U P E R R O R *

C H E C K V A L U E I N

V 7 6 2 0 T O V 7 6 2 2

PRESS

... withoutpropersetup program... withpropersetup program

7654321076543210

V 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0

The three change presetlistswe programmed inthe firstexamplesetup programare

accessible asacircularlist. Refertothe figure below.Upon entrytoChange Preset

Mode, the firstdisplayisautomaticallythe User--titled list. Fromthere,usethe Right

Arrowand Left Arrowkeys tomovetothe timertitlesand countertitlesdisplays.

PRESS

CursorPosition

PRESS

EnterChange PresetMode

7654321076543210

V 2300 0000

USER

TITLES

DATA

7654321076543210

TIMER 1 0000

TIMER

TITLES

DATA

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000

COUNTER

TITLES

DATA

Selecting the

List toDisplay

Change PresetMode

Press the EnterKeytotogglethe cursor

fromthe titletothe datafield and back. In

the titlefield, the cursoralways occupies

the right-mostcharacterposition .When

the cursorisinthe datafieldyou areready

to edit the data.

Title

Position

PRESS

Data

Position

toggles

V 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0

NOTE:Dataisrestricted tothe range of0000 to 9999 inChange PresetMode. If the

datayou areviewing alreadyhasone or more digitsinthe hexadecimalrange (A

through F),you mayonly view it. The DV-1000 classifiesthe entire numberas

hexadecimal,and will notallowkeypad entriesto editits value.

Oncethe cursorisinthe data position,use

the Rightand Left Arrowkeys tomove

the cursoramong the fourdigitpositions.

Thisworks incircularfashion,somoving

past the end of the datajumpsthe cursor

tothe opposite end of the datavalue.

Toincrementa digit, press the Plus(+)

Key.To decrementa digit, press the

Minus(--) Key.The range ofinputchange

isfrom0000 to 9999,BCD. Incrementing a

digitpast9 ordecrementing itpast0

automatically carriesto orborrowsfrom

(respectively)the digit(s)tothe left of the

cursorposition.

7654321076543210

V 2 3 0 0 1 2 3 4

DigitPositions

PRESS OR

PRESS

0000 9999

WARNING:Changing thepresetvalueon thedisplay as above immediately

changes the valueinPLCV-memory(thedisplay isnotbuffered).Equipment

damageorpersonnel injurymay occurfromimproperuse of thismode.Be

sureto pause a momentaftereachkeystroke toallowfortheDV-1000 display

update,sothatyou are viewing currentvalues ofChangePresetvariables.

The datafieldsinthe timerand counter

displays are edited in exactlythe same

wayasthe User-titled Presets.

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0

C O U N T E R 1 0 0 0 0

CursorPositioning

On TitleorData

Changing the

PresetValue

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Pre--labeled Timerand CounterPresets

Pre-labeled Timerand CounterPresetsaresimplerthan User-titled Presets,sowe

discuss thesefirst. Rememberthatoursetup mustinclude atleastone ofeachtitle

type.So,wechoose one User-titled Preset, (using the defaultlabel),sixteen

Pre-titled TimerPresets,and seven Pre-titled CounterPresets.The following table

summarizesourselections.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

(default)V2200 Timer1V2300 Counter1V2320

Timer2V2301 Counter2V2321

Timer3V2302 Counter3V2322

Timer4V2303 Counter4V2323

Timer5V2304 Counter5V2324

Timer6V2305 Counter6V2325

Timer7V2306 Counter7V2326

Timer8V2307

... ...

Timer16 V2317

Weselectno password,and useChange Presetasthe Powerup DefaultMode.

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Disable 0000 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetabovewecan determine the setup parameters.The numbers

arein boldtextinthe following table.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2200 startatV2200

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctalFFFF default titles

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 11title

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0001 ChangePreset

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 0000 Disabled

V7720*TimerDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7721*CounterDataPointerOctal2320 startatV2320

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 1607 16 timers,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722..

Change PresetMode

Inthis step we usethe information inthe setup parametertabletowritethe program.

Besureto payattention tothe datatype (octalorBCD)ofeachinstruction thatloads

tothe accumulator.Load thisprogramintoyourCPU,and usePresetMode tosee

how itperformsthe worksheetchoices.

SP0LDA

O2200

Load octaladdress 2200 intothe accumulator.V2200 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

ParameterSetup:ChangePreset

Kffff

Load the hex constantKFFFF intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7621

Output this constant toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK1(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constantK1toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK0toV7627, the location of the

Change Presetpassword.The value of0000 disablesit.

LDA

O2300

Load the octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2300 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2320 Load the octaladdress 2320 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K1607 Load the constantK1607 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7722

Output the constantK1607 toV7722, the location of the

block size bytesforTimerand Countertitled data.This

selects sixteen timersand seven counters.NOTE:DL130

and DL230 CPUsusememorylocation V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2320 toV7721, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

Load the constantK1intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK1toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0001

selectsChange PresetMode.

a:\preset2.prj

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

If you haveloaded the Timer/Counterexample programon the previouspage,we’re

readytosee how itwill perform foran operator.First, enterChange PresetMode by

pressing ChangePreseton the keypad.Then press the RightArrowKeytomove

tothe timertitleslist.

PRESS

7654321076543210

V 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

7654321076543210

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 2 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 3 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 4 0 0 0 0

PRESS

NOTE:In orderforthe newsetup parameterstotake effect, you musteitherpress a

key(preferablyChangePreset),orpower-cyclethe PLC.Eithereventcausesthe

DV-1000 tore-read its setup parametersfromV-memory.

the cursoroverthe titlesfield.Then use

the Plus(+)Keytoscroll downward.By

repeating this you can access all sixteen

timers.Then usethe Minus(--) Keyto

scroll upwardthrough the list.

TIMERTITLES DATA

TIMER 9 0000

TIMER10 0000

TIMER11 0000

TIMER12 0000

TIMER15 0000

TIMER14 0000

TIMER13 0000

TIMER 8 0000

TIMER 7 0000

TIMER 6 0000

TIMER 5 0000

TIMER 4 0000

TIMER 3 0000

TIMER 2 0000

TIMER 1 0000

T I M E R 9 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 1 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 2 0 0 0 0

CursorPosition

PRESS

TIMER16 0000

timerpresetlabels.Press the Cursor

RightKeytomovetothe countertitles

display.You can then scroll through all

seven countertitlesbyusing the Plus(+)

Keytoscroll downward,and the Minus(--)

Keytoscroll upward.

COUNTER

TITLES

DATA

COUNTER 4 0000

C O U N T E R 5 0 0 0 0

COUNTER 6 0000

COUNTER 7 0000

COUNTER 3 0000

COUNTER 2 0000

COUNTER 1 0000

NOTE:AppendixCof thismanualcontainsaworksheet forChange Preset

applications.Italsoincludesa decimal-to-octalconversion tableto helpcorrelate

timerlabelnumberswiththe numbering ofactualtimersand countersinthe CPU.

Scrolling Through

ChangePreset

Lists

Change PresetMode

Asmentioned at the beginning of this

chapter,Timerand CounterPresetLabels

serve onlytolabeldata on the DV-1000

display.Theselabelstreatall user

V-memoryequally,and do notdirectly

adjustladderlogictimerorcounter

instruction boxpresets. Instead,you use a

common V-memoryreference.

NOTE:The timerpresetinthe timerbox

mustnotbeaconstantKx,ifyou want the

Change Presetmode to adjust the timer

preset!

TMR

Bbbb

Taaa

Timernumber

TimerBox

TimerPreset

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0

TimerPresetatV2300

SupposewelocatePre-labeled “Timer1”preset to be atV2300,asinthe previous

example.Now,wecan associateitwith an actualtimerinaladderprogram.

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output thisaddress toV7720, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofTimer-titled

Presets.

Setup Program

TMR

V2300

TurnonTimer1when X0ison.EnterV2300 inthe preset

fieldforthe timer.

MainProgram

SupposewelocatePre-labeled “Counter1”presetatV2320,asinthe previous

example.Now,wecan associateitwith an actualcounterinaladderprogram.

SP0LDA

O2320

Load octaladdress 2320 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

Output thisaddress toV7721, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofCounter-titled

Presets.

Setup Program

CNT

V2320

IncrementCounter1when X0makesan off-to-on

transition.When the countervalue reachesthe preset

value inV2320, the counterstatusbitcomeson. InputX1

resetsthe counterand turnsoff the counterstatusbit.

CT1

MainProgram

Using PresetsWith

TimerBox

Instructions

Using PresetsWith

CounterBox

Instructions

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

User-titledPresets

The User--titled Change Presetdisplay

allows you tocreateyourowntext titlesof

up to eightcharactersinlength each.The

User--titlelistcan include from1to either

16 or32 titles(depending on CPUtype).

There arefourdisplaypositionspertitleto

the left ofeachrow.The DV-1000 reserves

the rightside ofeachrowfordisplaying the

presetdata,sothese do notmap intotitle

textpositions.Eachtextdisplayposition

correspondsto one V-memorylocation,

whichcontainstwo 8--bitASCII codes.

The displaypositionsare numbered in

octal, to helpyou referencethemto

corresponding V-memoryaddresses.

7654321076543210

15 17

1 3

1614

1311

TextDisplay Positions

a b c d e f g h 0 0 0 0

Usertitle

NOTE:The completeASCII tableforthe DV-1000 isinAppendixB.

Now weconsiderthe arbitrarytitle

“abcdefgh”on the top line of the display.

We haveto programV-memorywiththe

textdatainthe properlocation.Here are

the steps:

SWechoosethe User-titled Preset

titles starting address. Ourexample

arbitrarilyusesV2200.

SWechooseablock size ofone (one

title).Thismeanswereserve and

programfourV-memorylocationsfor

asingletitle.

SWe usethe textdisplayposition map

to programthe properfour

V-memorylocationswithASCII

codes.

NOTE:Thislistmaybe up to 16 or32 titles

long (maximumdetermined byCPUtype).

Tocalculatethe numberofV-memory

locationsrequired,justmultiplythe

numberof titlesbyfour.

Position Data TextV-Memory

0 4142 a2200

1 4344 c2201

2 4546 e2202

3 4748 g2203

4 00002204

5 00002205

6 00002206

7 00002207

10 2210 0000

11 00002211

12 00002212

13 00002213

14 00002214

15 00002215

16 00002216

17 00002217

TextDisplay Positions

TextData

7654321076543210

15 17

1614

1311

abcdefgh

ASCII codes

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

0 21 3

User-Titled

TextLabels

Change PresetMode

Afterchoosing the titlesand datato preset, wecan fill out the following application

worksheet. The fourUserPresetsData Locationsarelisted,and the text titlesareleft

blank.Notethatwe have one timerand counterlisted,because all three preset types

musthave atleastone entry.Finally,weselect the password(disabled)and the

powerup mode.We arbitrarily chooseChange Presetasthe Powerup DefaultMode.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

abcdefg V2200 V2300 Timer1V2304 Counter1V2305

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Disable 0000 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetabovewecan determine the setup parameters.The numbers

arein boldtextinthe following table.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctal2200 startatV2200

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 0001 1title

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0001 ChangePreset

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 0000 Disablepass-

word

V7720*TimerDataPointerOctal2301 startatV2304

V7721*CounterDataPointerOctal2302 startatV2305

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 0101 one timer,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722..

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.V2300 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

LDA

O2200

Load octaladdress 2200 intothe accumulator.V2200 isthe

beginning location of the userpreset titles.

OUT

V7621

Output this constant toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

a:\preset3.prj

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Load the constantK1(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constant1toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK0toV7627, the location of the

Change Presetpassword.The value of0000 disablesit.

LDA

O2301

Load the octaladdress 2301 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2300 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2302 Load the octaladdress 2302 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K101 Load the constantK101 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7722

Output the constant101 toV7722, the location of the block

size bytesforTimerand Countertitled data.This selects

one timerand one counter.NOTE:DL130 and DL230

CPUsusememorylocation V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2305 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

Load the constantK1intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK1toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0001

selectsChange PresetMode.

LDD

K63646162

Load ASCII constantsfor “abcd”inthe accumulator.

Remembertoswap positionsbetween the firstand second

pairofASCII codes.

OUTD

V2200

Placethe ASCII codesinthe User-titled textdata block.

Rememberto use onlyeven-numbered addresseswith

LDD/OUTDinstructions.

LDD

K67686566

Load ASCII constantsfor “efgh”inthe accumulator.

Remembertoswap positionsbetween the firstand second

pairofASCII codes.

OUTD

V2202

Placethe ASCII codesinthe User-titled textdata block.

Rememberto use onlyeven-numbered addresses.

Load

“abcdefgh”

The following diagramshowsthe resulting displays fromthe programexample

above.

7654321076543210

TIMER 1 0000

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000

7654321076543210

abcdefgh 0000

a:\preset3.prj

(

)

Change PresetMode

7654321076543210

V 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 1 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 2 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 0

Perhapsthe simplestapplication of

Change Preset titlesisthe default

user-titled presets.Supposewe are

debuggingamachine,and justwant to

preset fourV-memorylocations:V2300 --

V2303.Weselect the default titles(Vxxxx

addresses)as showntothe right. Thisisa

handy short-cutwheneverit’s

unnecessarytoinvest the timein

programming fancy text titles.

DesiredDisplay

To select thedefault titles, justenter“FFFF”inV7621, the setup parameterfor

the User-titled PresetPointer.

The titleselectionsaresummarized inthe following table.Notethe inclusion ofone

timerand counter,because all three preset typesmusthave atleastone entry.

Finally,weselect the password(disabled)and the powerup mode.We arbitrarily

chooseChange Presetasthe Powerup DefaultMode.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

(V2300)V2300 Timer1V2304 Counter1V2305

(V2301)V2301

(V2302)V2302

(V2303)V2303

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Disable 0000 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetabovewecan determine the setup parameters.The numbers

arein boldtextinthe following table.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctalFFFF usedefault title

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 44titles

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0001 ChangePreset

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 0000 Disabled

V7720*TimerDataPointerOctal2304 startatV2304

V7721*CounterDataPointerOctal2305 startatV2305

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 0101 one timer,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722..

DefaultUser

TitleList

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

The following programexample usesthe previous setup tableinformation.

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.V2300 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

ParameterSetup:ChangePreset

Kffff

Load the hex constantFFFF intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7621

Output this constant toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK4(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constant4toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK0toV7627, the location of the

Change PresetPassword.The value of0000 disablesit.

LDA

O2304

Load the octaladdress 2304 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2304 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2305 Load the octaladdress 2305 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K101 Load the constantK101 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7722

Output the constantK101 toV7722, the location of the

block size bytesforTitled Timerand Counterdata.This

selectsone each.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse

memorylocation V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2305 toV7721, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

Load the constantK1intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK1toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0001

selectsChange PresetMode.

The following diagramshowsthe resulting displays fromthe programabove.

7654321076543210

TIMER 1 0000

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000

7654321076543210

V2300 0000

V2301 0000

V2302 0000

V2303 0000

a:\preset4.prj

Change PresetMode

Now wewill write ourownUserTitles,

choosing meaningfulnamesforatypical

application.The list(showntothe right)is

eightitemslong,morethan the display

can showatone time.However, the

DV-1000 automaticallyadds scrolling

capability.Wewill disablethe password,

and chooseChange Presetasthe

Powerup DefaultMode.

USERTITLES DATA

H i A l a r m 0 0 0 0

L o A l a r m 0 0 0 0

S o a k T i m e 0 0 0 0

T e m p 1 0 0 0 0

G a l / M i n 0 0 0 0

T e m p 2 0 0 0 0

A c t u a l 0 0 0 0

S e t P o i n t 0 0 0 0

The following tablelistsourchoices.The ASCII codesforthe textof the User-titled

PresetsbeginsatV2200.Eachtitle’stextoccupiesfourV-memorylocations. One

timerand counterarelisted,just tomeet the required minimum.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

SetPointV2200 V2300 Timer1V2310 Counter1V2311

Value V2204 V2301

HiAlarmV2210 V2302

Lo alarmV2214 V2303

SoakTimeV2220 V2304

Temp1V2224 V2305

Temp2V2230 V2306

Gal/MinV2234 V2307

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Disable 0000 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetabovewecan determine the setup parameters.The numbers

arein boldtextinthe following table.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctal2200 startatV2200

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 88titles

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0001 ChangePreset

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 0000 Disabled

V7720*TimerDataPointerOctal2310 startatV2310

V7721*CounterDataPointerOctal2311 startatV2311

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 0101 one timer,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722.

User-titled Text

Example

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Inthis step we usethe information inthe setup parametertabletowritethe program.

The firstportion programsthe setup parameters.The second portion writesthe

User-Titled textdata using MOVEMCand ACONboxes.See the Message Display

Mode chapterforinformation on howtheseinstructionswork,ifnecessary.

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.V2300 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

LDA

O2200

Load octaladdress 2200 intothe accumulator.V2200 isthe

beginning address of the User-titled textdata.

OUT

V7621

Output this constant toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK8(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constantK8toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

Load the constantK1intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK1toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0001

selectsChange PresetMode.

Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK0toV7627, the location of the

Change PresetPassword.The value of0000 disablesit.

LDA

O2310

Load the octaladdress 2310 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2310 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2311 Load the octaladdress 2311 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K101 Load the constantK101 intothe accumulator

OUT

V7722

Output the constantK101 toV7722, the location of the

block size bytesforTitled Timerand Counterdata.This

selectsone each.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse

memorylocation V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2311 totoV7721, the location of

the setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

a:\preset5.prj

Change PresetMode

K10

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 (10

hex)words(fourtitlesforatotalof32 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

MOVMC

V2200

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2200.

K10

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 (10

hex)words(32 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

MOVMC

V2220

Movethe dataintoV-memory starting atV2220.

Move ACON Data

Into TextData

Block

END The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

DLBL

ACON

SetPointActualHiAlarmLo Alarm

DataforTitles 1 -- 4The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data

area containing ACONorNCONboxes.The

reference numberforthisarea isK1.

DLBL

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

ACON

SoakTimeTemp 1 Temp 2 Gal/Min

DataforTitles 5 -- 8The reference numberforthisarea isK2.

spaces:2 1 1

spaces:1 2 1 2 2

The following diagramshowsthe resulting displays fromthe programabove.

7654321076543210

TIMER 1 0000

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000Lo Alarm 0000

S o a k T i m e 0 0 0 0

Temp 1 0000

Temp 2 0000

Hi Alarm 0000

Actual 0000

Setpoint 0000

Gal/Min 0000

a:\preset5.prj

(

)

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

7654321076543210

S e t P o i n t 0 0 0 0

A c t u a l 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 2 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 0

The User-titled presetsalso providesan

option thatlets you havecustomtitlesand

the default(Vxxx)titles.The setup forthis

isjustasifall the titlesarecustom.

However,ifall the ASCII codes(4word

locations)foranytitle(s)isall zeros, then

the DV-1000 substitutesthe default title

instead.

DesiredDisplay

To selectanindividualdefault title, justenter“0000 0000”foritstextdata.

The titleselectionsaresummarized inthe following table.Notethe inclusion ofone

timerand counter,because all three preset typesmusthave atleastone entry.

Finally,weselect the password(disabled)and the powerup mode.We arbitrarily

chooseChange Presetasthe Powerup DefaultMode.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

SetpointV2200 V2300 Timer1V2304 Counter1V2305

ActualV2204 V2301

(V2302)V2210 V2302

(V2303)V2214 V2303

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Disable 0000 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetabovewecan determine the setup parameters.The numbers

arein boldtextinthe following table.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctal2200 usedefault title

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 44titles

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0001 ChangePreset

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 0000 Disabled

V7720*TimerDataPointerOctal2304 startatV2304

V7721*CounterDataPointerOctal2305 startatV2305

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 0101 one timer,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722.

IndividualDefault

UserTitles

Change PresetMode

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.V2300 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

LDA

O2200

Load octaladdress 2200 intothe accumulator.V2200 isthe

beginning address of the User-titled textdata.

OUT

V7621

Output this constant toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK4(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constant4toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

K1Load the constantK1intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK1toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0001

selectsChange PresetMode.

K0Load the constantK0intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK0toV7627, the location of the

Change PresetPassword.The value of0000 disablesit.

LDA

O2304 Load the octaladdress 2304 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2304 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2305 Load the octaladdress 2305 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K101 Load the constantK101 intothe accumulator

OUT

V7722

Output the constant101 toV7722, the location of the block

size bytesforTimerand Countertitled data.This selects

one each.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2305 toV7721, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

a:\preset6.prj

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis8

words(twotitlesforatotalof16 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

MOVMC

V2200

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2200,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the display.

Move ACON Data

Into TextData

Block

END The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

DLBL

ACON

SetPointActual

DataforTitles 1 -- 2The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data

area contraining ACONorNCONboxes.The

reference numberforthisarea isK1.

LDD

Load zerosintothe accumulator.

OUTD

V2210

Placethe zerosintothe textspacefortitle 3.

Rememberto use onlyeven addressesinOUTD

instructions.

OUTD

V2212

Loadzeros as

ASCII codes for

Titles 3 -- 4

Placethe zerosintothe textspacefortitle 3.

OUTD

V2214

Placethe zerosintothe textspacefortitle 4.

OUTD

V2216

Placethe zerosintothe textspacefortitle 4.

spaces:2

The following diagramshowsthe resulting displays fromthe programabove.

7654321076543210

TIMER 1 0000

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000

7654321076543210

SetPoint 0000

Actual 0000

V2302 0000

V2303 0000

a:\preset6.prj

(

)

Change PresetMode

Combination Titles Example

Asacomprehensive example,we’ll useseveralpresetsofeachtype of title,and use

a password.

SSixUser--titled PresetsplustwoDefaultUser-titled Presets

SFivePre-titled TimerPresets

SEightPre-titled CounterPresets

SPassword=1234,Powerup DefaultMode isChange Preset

NOTE:Afterloading the programforthisexample,a password entryisrequired in

ordertochange presets.The nextsection coversthe Change PresetPassword.

The following tablesummarizesourchoicesabove.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

SetPointV2200 V2300 Timer1V2310 Counter1V2330

Value V2204 V2301 Timer2V2311 Counter2V2331

HiAlarmV2210 V2302 Timer3V2312 Counter3V2332

Lo AlarmV2214 V2303 Timer4V2313 Counter4V2333

(V2304)V2220 V2304 Timer5V2314 Counter5V2334

(V2305)V2224 V2305 Counter6V2335

MixSpeed V2230 V2306 Counter7V2336

SoakTimeV2234 V2307 Counter8V2337

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Enable 1234 ChangePreset0001

Using the worksheetabovewecan determine the setup parameters(boldtext).

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctal2200 startatV2200

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD 88titles

V7626 PowerupModeBCD 0002 MessageMode

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD 1234 code=1234

V7720*TitledTimerDataPointerOctal2300 startatV2300

V7721*TitledCounterDataPointerOctal2320 startatV2320

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD 0508 5timers,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722.

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Inthis step we usethe information inthe setup parametertable and worksheet to

writethe program.The setup parameterportion isfirst, followed bythe MOVMCfor

the ACONboxes. One portion of the programloads zerosinforthe ASCII codesof

the text titles,sothe defaultVxxxx labelsappearforthosetitles.

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.V2300 isthe

beginning location of the userpresetvalues.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7620, the location of the setup

parameterforthe beginning address ofuserpresetvalues.

LDA

O2200

Load the octaladdress 2200 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7621

Output the address toV7621, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe starting address of the titletextblock.

FirstScanOnly

Load the constantK8(BCD)intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7622

Output the constantK8toV7622, the location of the setup

parameterforthe User-titled labelblock size.

K1234

Load the constantK1234 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7627

Output the constantK1234 toV7627, the location of the

Change PresetPassword.The passwordwill be “1234”.

LDA

O2310

Load the octaladdress 2310 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7720

Output the octaladdress 2310 toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Timer

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7640,notV7720.

LDA

O2330 Load the octaladdress 2330 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7721

K508 Load the constantK508 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7722

Output the constantK508 toV7722, the location of the

block size bytesforTimerand Countertitled data.This

selectsfivetimersand eightcounters.NOTE:DL130 and

DL230 CPUsusememorylocation V7642,notV7722.

Output the octaladdress 2330 toV7721, the location of the

setup parameterforthe starting address of the Counter

Presets.NOTE:DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememory

location V7641,notV7721.

Load the constantK2intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7626

Output the constantK2toV7626, the location of the

Powerup DefaultMode setup parameter.The value of0002

selectsMessage DisplayMode.

a:\preset7.prj

Change PresetMode

K10

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 (10

hex)words(fourtitlesforatotalof32 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

MOVMC

V2200

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2200,

corresponding tothe first fourtitles.

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis8words

(16 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

MOVMC

V2230

Movethe dataintoV-memory starting atV2230,

corresponding totitles7 and 8.

Move ACON Data

Into TextData

Block

END The end coil terminatesthe main programsection.

LDD

Load a doublewordconstantzerointothe

accumulator.

OUTD

V2220

Placezerosinthe text titlelocation forthe fifthtext

title.

Use DefaultTitles

forTitles 5 and 6

OUTD

V2222

Placezerosinthe text titlelocation forthe fifthtext

title.

OUTD

V2224

Placezerosinthe text titlelocation forthe sixthtext

title.

OUTD

V2226

Placezerosinthe text titlelocation forthe sixthtext

title.

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

DLBL

ACON

SetPointActualHiAlarmLo Alarm

Text forTitles 1 -- 4The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa data

area containing ACONorNCONboxes.The

reference numberforthisarea is specified byK1.

DLBL

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

ACON

MixSpeedSoakTime

Text forTitles 7 and 8

spaces:

spaces:2 11

a:\preset7.prj

(

)

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

ChangePresetPassword

If the setup parametersarevalidyou will be ableto enterChange PresetMode.And,

if the passwordisdisabled (V7627 =“0000”),you may change presets.However,ifa

password existsinV7627,access will be locked.When thisoccurs,pressing the

EnterKeywill notmovethe cursortothe datafieldforediting.

FeatureV7627 Contents

PasswordDisabled0000

Password Enabled,

password=0001 to 9999

0001 to 9999

To unlock access tochange presets,go tothe password utilityunderthe Options

Menu.Justpress the OptionsKey,and the menu on the displaybelow will appear.

Then press the Plus(+)Keytocursorfromitem1toitem2(password utility).

7654321076543210

O P T I O N

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 P A S S W O R D

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

Then press the EnterKey,and the password displaybelow will appear.The cursor

will be overthe right-mostdigitof the password.

7654321076543210

P A S S W O R D

0 0 0 0

PRESS

Supposethe passwordis“1234” (V7627 =“1234”).Now,usethe Plus(+)Keyto

increment the digits,and the arrowkeys tomovethe cursorfromdigit to digit. After

incrementing to“1234”,press the EnterKeytosubmit the password.

7654321076543210

P A S S W O R D

1 2 3 4

PRESS

Unlocking Access

toChangePresets

Change PresetMode

If the passwordsubmitted matchesthe one stored inV-memory(V7627), the display

on the left will appear. If the password entrywasincorrect, the displayon the rightwill

appear.

7654321076543210

PASSWORD MATCH

1 2 3 4

7654321076543210

WRONG PASSWORD

1 2 2 3

When you submit the correctpassword, the DV-1000 automaticallyreturnstothe

Change PresetMode.And,you will have access tochange presets. Incorrect

password entriesare noted inthe display,and the display continuesto promptyou

forthe correctpassword.To aborta password entryattempt, justpress one of the

keys forthe otherDV-1000 modes.

After making the desired changesto presets,you maywant tolock access againto

Change PresetMode.Thisistypical when the DV-1000 isaccessibletomultiple

personnelon the factoryfloor.Tolock access,returntothe password utilityagain by

pressing the OptionsKey,selecting “Password”,and pressing Enter.The following

displaywill appear.

7654321076543210

P A S S W O R D

0 0 0 0

PRESS

Withoutincrementing the passwordvalue,justpress the EnterKeyagain.The

displaybelow will appear,indicating thataccess tochange presetshasbeen locked

(notethat the “0000”doesnotindicatethat the password hasbeen changed tothat

number).

7654321076543210

P A S S W O R D L O C K E D

0 0 0 0

PRESS

Afterthe displayindicates“PASSWORD LOCKED”foramoment, itautomatically

returnstoChange PresetMode.Access tochanging presetswill be locked,sothe

EnterKeywill no longer movethe cursorovertothe datafield.Unlocking access

again onlyrequiresentering the valid password,as shownonthe previouspage.

If the machine operatorforgetsthe password and hasno other record ofit, you can

usethe DV-1000’sStatusDisplayMode toviewthe contentsofV7627.Then go back

tothe OptionsMenu and enterthe password.Notethat the “Operator’sGuide to

Change PresetMode”laterinthis chapterintentionallydoesnotinclude thistip!

Locking Access to

ChangePresets

Forgot the

Password?

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

SpecialTopics forChangePresets

If yourapplication program requires

timerand counterpresets,remember

that the pre-labeled Timerand Counter

Preset titlesinthe DV-1000 aretherejust

foryourconvenience. Instead ofusing

the generictitles such as“Timer1”you

mayprefer moremeaningfultitlesfor

yourapplication such asthoseshownto

the upper right.

Counterpreset titles can also be custom

titlesifyou prefer.Some examplesare

listed inthe displaytothe lower right.

7654321076543210

S t o p T i m e 0 2 1 0

D e l a y 1 3 9 9

R u n T i m e 2 8 4 7

D w e l l 0 0 5 3

7654321076543210

P a r t C N T 0 5 7 5

L e n g t h 1 1 3 3 0

T o t a l R u n 0 5 7 5

Q C P A S S 0 5 4 3

The following examplecreatestwotimers,using “StopTime”and “Delay”fortimer

titles.The titletextisloaded withthe ACONand MOVEMC instructions.

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis8

words(twotitlesforatotalof16 characters).

Load the address offset. Fornearlyevery

MOVMCused forACONdata, therewill be

zero offset(useK0).

LDLBL

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

MOVMC

V2200

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2200,

corresponding tothe top twolineson the

display.

Move ACON Data

Into TextData

Block

END The end coil terminatesthe main program

section.

Usethe ASCII Constant(ACON)boxto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

DLBL

ACON

StopTimeDelay

DataforTitles The Data Labelboxmarks the beginning ofa

data area containing ACONorNCONboxes.

SP0LDA

O2300

Load octaladdress 2300 intothe accumulator.

OUT

V7620

Output thisaddress toV7720, the location of the

setup parameterforthe beginning address of

User-titled Presets.

TMR

V2300

TurnonTimer0when X0ison.The presetvalue for

Timer0isatV2300.Note:If using DL105 be sure

CPUisinitialized tomakeX0 operational.

MainProgram

TMR

V2301

TurnonTimer1when X1ison.The presetvalue for

Timer1isatV2301.(Include asmanyof theserungs

as you havetimersorcounters).

Insert the other rungsof the setup programhere.They

aretypicalforUser-titled presets.(The disk example

is complete.)

Setup Program

spaces:3

Timerand Counter

Presetswith

CustomTitles

a:\preset8.prj

Change PresetMode

V-memory values change immediatelywhen you edit theminChange PresetMode.

Thisis safelydone ifyou makerelatively small incrementalchangesand monitor

theireffectson the process.However,some applicationsmayrequireyou tomake a

singlestep change to one or more presets.Situationsthatmayrequirethisinclude:

SChangingasingle preset to a newvalue,avoiding valuesin between

SChanging severalpresetsto newvaluesat the samemoment(scan)

SCoordinating a presetchange with otherexternalevents

Wecan solvethese problemsbyusing Change Preset to update a temporary

variable.See the figure below.When the ladderprogramdetectsan eventcontact, it

copiesthe temporary variabletothe permanentvariablelocation.

V2200 XXXX

Temporarypreset

V2300 XXXX

Permanentpreset

Change Preset

(edit) (copy)

Inthe following program, the permanentpresetvalue isatV2300 and the temporary

presetvalue isatV2200.Wewouldliketo updateV2300 onlywhen inputX0 hasan

off-to-on transition.The programalso hasatime-out feature.Forexample,entera

newvalue inlocation V2200.V2200 and V2300 no longer matchsothe timer

starts.TurnonX0within30secondsto updateV2300 tomatchthe newV2200 value.

If X0isnot turned on within30secondsofentering the newvalue the program

automatically changesV2200 back tomatchthe originalV2300 value.Notethat

changing Timer1’spresetvalue changesthe amountof time allowed toturn on X0.

OUT

V2200

CopyPreset to

TempValue

SP0Place normalChange Presetsetup rung here.Note

thatweconfigurethe temporarypresetatV2200 as

the Change Presetarea.

V2300

Load the presetvalue atV2300 intothe accumulator.

TMR

K300

TurnonTimer1when V2200 and V2300 are not

equal.Thismeansthe operatorbegan editing V2200,

buthasnotmade the change finalbyusing X0.

V2200

MainProgram

Setup Program

C0TurnonC0forone scan when X0makesan

OFF-to-ONtransition.Note:If using DL105 be sure

CPUisinitialized tomakeX0 operational.

V2200

OUT

V2300

Load the presetatV2300 intothe accumulatorwhen

the 30 secondsofTimer1 hasexpired.The operator

edited V2200,butdid not finalizethe change withX0.

OUT

V2200

V2300

Overwritethe temporary value thatwas changed by

the operator.NowV2300 and V2200 are equal,and

Timer1isturned off on the nextscan.

Load the temporarypresetvalue which hasbeen

edited intothe accumulator.

Change the actualpresetatV2300 tomatchthe

temporarypresetvalue when X0triggerson.

Updatethe temporarypresetvalue tomatchthe

permanentpresetvalue ateverypowerup,sothey

begin asequivalents.Remember, the operatoronly

seesthe temporary variableinV2200.

BufferedPreset

Values

a:\preset9.prj

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

Operator’sGuidetoChangePreset Mode

This2-page guide contains condensed

instructionsfor machine operatorson how

to useChange PresetMode. It assumes

the DV-1000 installation and

programming arecomplete.

To enterChange PresetMode,justpress

the ChangePresetKeyon the keypad.

The User-titled Presetswill appear.

PRESS

7654321076543210

S e t P o i n t 0 4 2 5

A c t u a l 0 4 3 2

H i A l a r m 0 4 5 0

L o A l a r m 0 3 9 5

Three change presetlistsare accessibleinacircularlist. Refertothe figure below.

Upon entrytoChange PresetMode, the firstdisplayisautomaticallythe User--titled

list. Fromthere,usethe RightArrowand Left ArrowKeys tomovetothe timertitles

and countertitlesdisplays.

PRESS

CursorPosition

7654321076543210

V2300 0000

USER

TITLES

DATA

7654321076543210

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0

TIMER

TITLES

DATA

7654321076543210

COUNTER 1 0000

COUNTER

TITLES

DATA

PRESS

Press the EnterKeytotogglethe cursor

between the title and datafields.When the

cursorisinthe datafieldyou arereadyto

edit the data.

NOTE:If pressing the EnterKeydoesnot

movethe cursortothe data position,

access tochange presetsislocked.You

must firstenterthe correctpassword(see

nextpage).

Title

Position

PRESS

Data

Position

toggles

7654321076543210

S e t P o i n t 0 0 0 0

A c t u a l 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 2 0 0 0 0

V 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 0

WARNING:Changing thepresetvalueon thedisplay immediately changes the

valueinPLCV-memory(thedisplay isnotbuffered).Equipmentdamageor

personnel injurymay occurfromimproperuse of thismode.Be sureto pause

amomentaftereachkeystroke toallowfortheDV-1000 display update,sothat

you are viewing currentvalues ofChangePresetvariables.

Selecting the

List toDisplay

CursorPositioning

On TitleorData

Change PresetMode

Toscroll the displaywindowdownward or

upwardthrough a selected list, position

the cursoroverthe title(usethe EnterKey

totoggleitsposition between the title or

data.Then usethe Plus(+)and Minus(--)

Keys toscroll the display.

TIMER 9 0000

TIMER10 0000

TIMER12 0000

TIMER13 0000

TIMER16 0000

TIMER15 0000

TIMER14 0000

TIMER 8 0000

TIMER 7 0000

TIMER 6 0000

TIMER 5 0000

TIMER 4 0000

TIMER 3 0000

TIMER 2 0000

TIMER 1 0000

7654321076543210

T I M E R 9 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 0 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 1 0 0 0 0

T I M E R 1 2 0 0 0 0

CursorPosition

PRESS

TIMER99 0000

Withthe cursorinthe data position,use

the CursorRightand CursorLeft keys to

moveitamong the fourdigitpositions.

Press the Plus(+)Keytoincrementa

digit, and the Minus(--) Keyto decrement

it. The range ofinputchange isfrom0000

to 9999,BCD. Incrementing past9 or

decrementing past0carriesto orborrows

from (respectively)the digit(s)tothe left of

the cursorposition.

V 2 3 0 0 1 2 3 4

DigitPositions

PRESS OR

PRESS

0000 9999

To entera password,press the OptionsKeytoview

the Optionsmenu.Press the Plus(+)Keytomove

the cursortothe password option.Then press the

EnterKey.Usethe Plus(+)Keyand CursorKeys

toincrement the passwordcode tothe correct

value.Then press Enter.7654321076543210

OPTION

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 P A S S W O R D

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

7654321076543210

PASSWORD

0000

PRESS PRESS

7654321076543210

PASSWORD

1234

7654321076543210

P A S S W O R D M A T C H

1 2 3 4

PRESS

(asneeded)

and

Forcorrectpassword entries, the message “PASSWORD MATCH”isbriefly

displayed.The DV-1000 returnstothe previous(Change Preset) Mode. Incorrect

passwords yieldthe message “WRONGPASSWORD”.

If yourDV-1000 setup requiresa password,you can

lock access again afterchanging presets.Just

followthe instructionsaboveforentering a

password,butenter “0000”forthe password.The

message “PASSWORD LOCKED”confirms your

action.Nowaccess tochanging presetsislocked.

PRESS

7654321076543210

P A S S W O R D L O C K E D

0 0 0 0

Scrolling Through

ChangePreset

Lists

Changing the

PresetValue

Entering a

Password

Locking Access to

ChangePresets

Mode

Change Preset

Change PresetMode

ChapterSummary

Now we havecovered Change Preset titletypesand howto editdata using the

keypad.

Wemay summarizesome of the keypointswe havelearned aboutChange Preset

Mode inthis chapter:

SChange PresetsimplymeansChange V-memorydata.

SChanging dataonthe displayimmediatelychangesthe value inthe

PLC.Thereisno prompt forconfirmation of the change.

SIn orderforthe change ofa preset(V-memorydata)tochange the

behaviorofyourprocess,someinstruction(s)inthe ladder main

programhastoread the V-memorydata and useit.

SThree typesofpreset titlesare availableinChange PresetMode.

SIf you useChange PresetMode inyourapplication,all three titletypes

mustbe setup foratleastone title.Thismeansthe three block size

setup parametersmustbe equalto one orgreater.

SAccess tochanging presets can be password protected with password

codes0001 -- 9999.Ifyou do notwishto use a password,programthe

code “0000”intothe passwordlocation to disablethe passwordfeature.

SIf you are usingaTimerorCounterBoxInstruction and you want to

change itspresetvalue withPresetMode,itmustbeaVxxxx variable

type,notaconstantKx!

SIf preferred,you can haveUser-titled presetlabelsfortimersand

countersinthe ladderprogram.The pre-labeled timerand countertitles

arejust foryourconvenience,and toconserveV-memorywhen

required.

SChange PresetMode will allowthe editing ofBCD numbers(0000 to

9999).IfaV-memorylocation containsa hexnumber,Change Preset

will notallowthe editing ofits value!

SThe setup programforchange PresetMode can generallybe confined

to executeonthe firstscan,asdo all the programexamplesinthis

chapter.

SThe Operator’sGuide nearthe end of this chaptercontainsinstructions

foramachine operatoron howtochange presets.Feelfree tocopyits

two pagesand postiton the machine asaresourceforitsoperator(s).

SAppendixCcontainsworksheetsforChange PresetMode foryou to

copyand usetocreateyourapplication program.

Summaryof

Key Points

BitControlMode

In ThisChapter....

—Overview

—Setup ParametersforBitControl

—Usingthe KeypadTo DoBitControl

—BitControlApplications

—ChapterSummary

Mode

BitControlMode

Overview

BitControlMode permits you to usekeys on the DV-1000 keypad forindividual

controlofeight I/O bits.The typesof I/O bitsthatmaybe controlled areX,Y,and C.

The GXtype isalso available on DL405 CPUsonly.For mostapplications,Ctype

(controlrelays)arethe bestchoice.

The following figureshowsan expanded viewof the PLC’sV-memory space.A

DV-1000 setup parameterinV-memorypointstoasystemI/O dataword. It may

point toanX,Y,C,orGXwordlocation (we usecontrolrelays (C)asan example).

The DV-1000 keypad will controlthe lower8 bitsof the word.Atpowerup the

DV-1000 readsthisBitControlsetup parameter.Then,wheneveryou selectBit

ControlMode the DV-1000 keypad controls(writes)the state of the eight I/O bits.

V--MemorySpace

SystemI/O

UserV-memory

Setup Parameters

GXI/OPoints

XInputs

YOutputs

CControlRelays

LadderProgram

WRITE

READ

The drawing aboveshowshowthe DV-1000 keypad can controleightbitsin

V-memory.However, foranything meaningfulto happen something else hastoread

the bitsand acton theirstatus.Thismayoccurintwoways:

SForX,C,and GXinput types,ladderlogicmustreferencethe bit

addressesasan inputcontact.

SForYand GXoutput types,an outputmodule pointmustexistat the

addresses. Inthis casethe ladderprogram mustnotreferencethe

same outputbits,in orderto avoidaconflict.

Mode

BitControlMode

WARNING:BitControl isdesignedfordebug purposes only.Major machine

functions suchas Start,Stop,Run,Jog,etc.need dedicatedelectrical

controlswithlabels.TheDV-1000’sBitControlModedoes notgive a constant

indication that thenormalkeypadfunctionshave changed! Misuse of thistool

canleadto damageofequipmentor risk ofseriousinjuryto personnel.

InBitControlMode, the keys marked withindexnumbersinthe figure belowassume

newfunctionality.Theyoperate asmomentarypush-buttons,normallyoff. When

pressed,each of the eightkeys will turnonitsassociated I/O bit. Theymap to either

X,Y,C,orGXtypes.When the keyisreleased, the I/O bitautomaticallyturnsoff.

Press the ClearKeyto exitBitControlMode.The Enterkeyisnotused.

0 1

BitControlKeys

Momentary,N.O.Push-buttons

Press =1,

Release=0

I/OBits

Exit

ToselectBitControlMode,go tothe optionsmenu bypressing the OptionsKey.Bit

Control isthe firstof three items you may select, sothe cursorwill alreadybe

positioned overitemone.

7654321076543210

O P T I O N

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 P A S S W O R D

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

Press EntertoselectBitControl.The displaymessage will then ask fora

confirmation ofyourchoice byasking “Doyou wantBitControlMode?”At thispoint,

when you press Enterthe setup error message will be displayed as shown below. In

the nextsection weshowhoweasy itistochoose propersetup parameters.

7654321076543210

* S E T U P E R R O R *

C H E C K V A L U E I N

V 7 6 2 5

(withoutsetup program)

7654321076543210

D O Y O U W A N T B I T

CONTROL MODE?

YES:PUSH ENT KEY

NO :PUSH CLR KEY

PRESS PRESS

Keypad Function

inBitControl

Accessing Bit

Control

Mode

BitControlMode

Setup ParametersforBitControl

The following tableliststhe subsetof the DV-1000 setup parameterswhich pertainto

Change PresetMode.The parameteratV7625 selectsthe address of the

bit-controlled wordinsystemI/O space.The parameteratV7626 selectsthe

powerup defaultmode.

V-MemoryLocation Setup ParameterDescription

V7625 BitControlI/OPointer

V7626 PowerupDefaultMode

Now we havetochoosethe I/O address of the bitswewant tocontrol.Refertothe

columnsinthe following tableswhichcorrespond tothe type ofCPU inyoursystem.

Since ourPLCsmap theirdiscreteI/O bitsintoV-memory,we havetochoosethe

corresponding address.

DL130,DL230 DL240 DL250,DL350

I/OTypeDiscrete

Address

(octal)

Word

Address

(octal)

Discrete

Address

(octal)

Word

Address

(octal)

Discrete

Address

(octal)

Word

Address

(octal)

Input

Points

X0-- X177 V40400 --

V40407

X0-- X477 V40400 --

V40423

X0-- X777 V40400 --

V40437

Output

Points

Y0-- Y177 V40500 --

V40507

Y0-- Y477 V40500 --

V40523

Y0-- Y777 V40500 --

V40537

Control

Relays

C0-- C377 V40600 --

V40617

C0--C377 V40600 --

V40617

C0-C1777 V40600 --

V40677

Global

Inputs

N/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A

DL430 DL440 DL450

I/OTypeDiscrete

Address

(octal)

Word

Address

(octal)

Discrete

Address

(octal)

Word

Address

(octal)

Discrete

Address

(octal)

Word

Address

(octal)

Input

Points

X0-- X477 V40400 --

V40423

X0-- X477 V40400 --

V40423

X0--

X1777

V40400 --

V40477

Output

Points

Y0-- Y477 V40500 --

V40523

Y0-- Y477 V40500 --

V40523

Y0--

Y1777

V40500 --

V40577

Control

Relays

C0--C737 V40600 --

V40635

C0--

C1777

V40600 --

V40677

C0--

C3777

V40600 --

V40777

Global

Inputs

GX0--

GX777

V40000 --

V40037

GX0--

GX1777

V40000 --

V40077

GX0--

GX2777

GY0--

GY2777

V40000 --

V40137

V40200 --

V40377

Mode

BitControlMode

Forexample,supposewe assign BitControltothe eightcontrolrelays C0toC7.The

table above givesthe address of these asV40600,whichwe enteratV7625.Finally,

weselectMessage Mode withBitControlbyentering “0012”inV7626.The following

programdoesthe parametersetup forthesechoices.

SP0LDA

O40600

Load octaladdress 40600 intothe accumulator.V40600 is

the location ofC0toC17.

OUT

V7625

Output thisaddress toV7625, the location of the setup

parameterforBitControl.

ParameterSetup:BitControl

K12

Load the BCD constantK12 intothe accumulator.Itisthe

code toselectBitControland Message Mode.Thisis

optional,as you may selecta differentpowerup mode.

OUT

V7626

Output this constant toV7626, the location ofsetup

parameterforthe defaultpowerup mode.

FirstScanOnly

a:\bitctrl1.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

Using theKeypadToDoBitControl

This section requiresthe parametersetup programof the previous section to be

loaded inyourCPU. If you have done so,we’rereadytosee first-hand howbitcontrol

works fromthe keypad.The setup parameteryou haveloaded forV7625 pointsto

controlrelays C0toC7,located atV40600.Now,enterStatusDisplayMode tosee

bitcontrol work.Then selectvariabletype “C”.

PRESS

7654321076543210

X 0 0

X 1 0

X 2 0

X 3 0

PRESS

7654321076543210

C 0 0

C 1 0

C 2 0

C 3 0

NOTE:when using someCPUs, the plus

(+)onlyneedsto be pressed once.

WithStatusMode setup,nowusethe OptionsMenu toselectBitControlMode.

7654321076543210

OPTION

1 B I T C O N T R O L

2 PASSWORD

3 S H O W E R R / M S G

PRESS

7654321076543210

D O Y O U W A N T B I T

CONTROL MODE?

Y E S : P U S H E N T K E Y

N O : P U S H C L R K E Y

PRESS

7654321076543210

Y O U A R E I N

B I T C O N T R O L M O D E

(Automatic...)

(withsetup program)

7654321076543210

C 0 0

C 1 0

C 2 0

C 3 0

NOTE:Line3(SHOWERR/MESG)

doesnotapplytosomeCPUs.

Afterselecting BitControl, the StatusMode displayautomaticallyreturns.The

keypad isnow inBitControlMode,and the displayisinStatusMode!Thispermitsus

to observechangesinC0toC7inrealtimeforBitControlkeyactions.Notethat the

display cursorisabsentnow,becausethe keypad function has changed.

Selecting

BitControland

StatusModes

Mode

BitControlMode

Now wecan haveacloserlookat the statusof the bitsinV40600 during bitcontrol. In

the figure below, the keypad mapsto bits0through 7 as shown.

MSB LSB

013456789101112131415 2Bit

0 1

Bits8to 15

reserved

(Do notuse)

C12

C13

C14

C15

C16

C17

C11

C10

C0C7C10C17

Bits0to 7

mappedto

keypad

NOTE:Sincethe DV-1000 doeswordwrite operations,itwrites zerosto bits8

through 15 (C10 toC17).Therefore,avoid using these eight I/O pointsinyourladder

programin orderto avoidaconflict. ThisholdstrueforanyX,YC,and GXI/O

pointwordaddress pointedto byV7625.

To observeBitControl in action, followthe keystrokesinthe following diagram.

Noticethe relative binaryweighting ofeachkey,and the normally-off momentary

nature ofeachkey switch.

PRESS

(NoKeyPressed)

C 0 0

MSB LSB

KeypadBit

Mapping

Mode

BitControlMode

Whilethe keypad isinBitControlMode,

the displaymaybe in eitherStatus

Display,Message Display,orChange

PresetModes.When you want the keypad

toresume normalfunction,press the

ClearKeyto exitBitControlMode.

7654321076543210

D O Y O U W A N T B I T

CONTROL MODE?

YES:PUSH ENT KEY

NO :PUSH CLR KEY

PRESS

Next, press the ClearKeyasecond timetoconfirm the exit. An exitmessage

appearsbriefly.Then the displayreturnstothe previousmode,and the keypad

resumesitsnormalfunction associated withthe displaymode. Inthe previous

section weweremonitoring the statusofC0toC7 ataddress V40600.Noticethat the

cursor returnstoindicate normalkeypad functionality.

PRESS

7654321076543210

E X I T B I T

CONTROL MODE

(Automatic...)

7654321076543210

C 0 0

C 1 0

C 2 0

C 3 0

Exiting BitControl

Mode

BitControlMode

BitControlApplications

BitControlMode ismostoften used fordebugging machinesorprocesses.Using

the setup parameteratV7625 wecan configureBitControlforX,Y,C,and GXtypes

of I/O points. It’sa good idea to plan the I/O points you want to useinBitControl,and

integrateitintothe mainladderprogram.The mainreason isthatBitControl

requestsI/O pointson. ItisnotaforcedI/O feature!

Forexample,considerthe systemshown below.Supposewewant totestoutputY0

using BitControl.

8pt

Input

8pt

Input

16pt

Output

16pt

Output

16pt

Output

16pt

Input

X10

X17

X20

X37

Y17

V40500

Y20

Y37

Y40

Y57

The I/O address ofY0toY17 isatV40500.The following programexamplesetsup

BitControlMode forY0toY7.ItshowsY0 being normally controlled byX0.However,

ladderlogicwill overwritetheDV-1000’srequested on stateofY0 at the end of

every scan,because Y0is alsoreferencedas an outputcoil intheprogram!

See the nextexampleforthe proper method todothis.

SP0LDA

O40500

Load octaladdress 40500 intothe accumulator.V40500 is

the location ofY0toY17.

OUT

V7625

Output thisaddress toV7625, the location of the setup

parameterforbitcontrol.

ParameterSetup:BitControl

MainProgram

X0Y0

0 1

Y0isnormally controlled byX0inthe application.Itisalso

requested on during BitControl,when the Change Preset

Keyispressed.

WRONG!

I/O Debug

Mode

BitControlMode

Instead of trying to bitcontrolY0 directly,we use a controlrelayand do a logicalOR

withthe normalcontrol logicforY0.Then wesetup BitControlMode forC0toC7.

Nowthe conflictiseliminated,becauseC0isonlyreferenced asan inputinthe

program.

SP0LDA

O40600

Load octaladdress 40600 intothe accumulator.V40600 is

the location ofC0toC17.

OUT

V7625

Output thisaddress toV7625, the location of the setup

parameterforbitcontrol.

ParameterSetup:BitControl

MainProgram

X0Y0

0 1

Y0isnormally controlled byX0inthe application.Itisalso

controlled byC0whichisrequested on during BitControl,

when the Change PresetKeyispressed.

CORRECT!

Mode

BitControlMode

The ladderprograminthisexample

coordinatesBitControlkeypad entries

withMessage Displayoutput. The display

announcesthe twomodesas shown,and

prompts you to press anybitcontrolkey.

When any keyispressed, the message on

the bottomline changesto namethe key

pressed.7654321076543210

BIT CONTROL MODE

& M E S S A G E M O D E

P r e s s K e y s - - - - >

(no key pressed)

PRESS

7654321076543210

B I T C O N T R O L M O D E

& M E S S A G E M O D E

P r e s s K e y s - - - - >

C H G P R E K e y

7654321076543210

B I T C O N T R O L M O D E

& M E S S A G E M O D E

P r e s s K e y s - - - - >

M S G K e y

PRESS

The ladderprogramhasno meansof forcing the displayintoMessage Display

Mode,northe keypad intoBitControlMode.However, thesemodesmaybe

selected fromthe keypad,aswell asprogrammed asthe powerup default. The

programcreatesthe displayoutputwithACONand MOVMC instructions.Load the

programbelow,and placethe CPU inrun mode.Then powercyclethe CPU,and it

should enterBitControland Message DisplayModes.Watchthe bottomline of the

displayrespond as you press eachBitControlkey.

NOTE:Thisexamplecontains certaininstructionsincluding LDLBL,DLBL,ACON,

and MOVMC which are discussed in detail inChapter4.Refertothe the section

“Using the ASCII Constant(ACON)Instruction”for moreinformation.

Setup ParametersforBitControland MessageMode

LDA

O40600

OUT

V7625

K12

OUT

V7626

LDA

O2100

Load the octaladdress forV40600 intothe

accumulator.C0through C17 mapstoV40600.

Output the address intoV7625, the location of the bit

controlregister.The bitcontrolkeys controlC0toC7.

Outputourpowerup defaultcode toV7626, the

location of the Powerup Defaultsetup parameter.

Load the octaladdress forV2100 intothe

accumulator.

SP0

Firstscan only

Load the constantK12 intothe accumulator.K12 is

the code forthe powerup defaultmodesMessage

DisplaywithBitControl.

OUT

V7624

Output the address intoV7624, the location of the

textdata block pointerforMessage DisplayMode.

BitControlWith

MessageDisplay

Mode

a:\bitctrl2.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

K10

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2100

LDLBL

MOVMC

V2120

VC0

Load the currentkeypad bitpatternintothe

accumulator.

V40600 V2000

ActivatecontrolrelayC20 for1scan when the

keypad’sbitpattern atV40600 changesfromthe saved

pattern atV2000.

C20

OUT

V2000

C20 LDLBL

SP0

Top 2Display Lines

ThirdDisplay LineLoad the numberofdatalocations,whichis8

words(one line, foratotalof16 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK2.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2120.

Load the numberofdatalocations,whichis16 (10

hex)words(twolines, foratotalof32 characters).

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK1.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV2100.

Overwritethe saved bitpattern atV2000,whichis

one scan old.Thispreparesforthe comparison

againonthe nextscan.

The nextseveralrungswithC20 contactexecutefor

1scan when the keypad bitpatternchanges.Load

the constantK8intothe accmulator.

Load the address offset. FornearlyeveryMOVMC

used forACONdata, therewill be zero offset(use

K0).

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK3if the

CHGPRE Keyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK4if the

MSGKeyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK5if the

STATKeyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK6if the

OPTKeyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK7if the

Arrow<-- Keyispressed.

(continued)

a:\bitctrl2.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

END Markthe end of the main programwithanEnd Coil

C20 LDLBL

K10

C20 LDLBL

K11

C20 MOVMC

V2130

VC0K0

UseASCII Constant(ACON)boxesto ente

textcharactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

DLBL

ACON

BITCONTROLMODE& MESSAGEMODE

DataforTop 2Display Lines

The Data Labelboxesmarkthe beginning ofa

data area containing ACONboxes.The constant

in each boxisthe reference numberforthe text

datawhichfollows.

DLBL

ACON

Press Keys -------->

Datafor3rdDisplay Line

UseASCII Constant(ACON)boxesto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

spaces:1 1

spaces:21 11 1

DLBL

ACON

CHGPRE Key

spaces:1 1

DLBL

DataforBottomDisplay (foreachkey)

ACON

MSGKey

spaces:1 9

DLBL

ACON

STATKey

spaces:1 8

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK8if

the Arrow-->Keyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK9if

the Minus(--) Keyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK10 if

the Plus(+)Keyispressed.

Read fromthe ACONfollowing Data LabelK11 if

no keyispressed.

Move dataintoV-memory starting atV21300.

same

(continued)

a:\bitctrl2.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

DLBL

ACON

OPTKey

UseASCII Constant(ACON)boxesto entertext

charactersdirectlyfromthe keyboard.

spaces:1 9

DLBL

ACON

Arrow<-- Key

spaces:1 1

DLBL

DataforBottomDisplay (foreachkey),cont’d

ACON

Arrow-->Key

spaces:1 1

DLBL

ACON

Minus(--) Key

spaces:1 1

DLBL

K10

ACON

Plus(+)Key

spaces:1 4

DLBL

K11

ACON

(no keypressed)

spaces:1

same

(continued)

a:\bitctrl2.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

Insome applications you mayneed bitcontrolofmorethan 8 bitsfromthe keypad.

Using ladderlogic,you can share(multiplex)the bitcontrolkeys among multiple

outputs.Refertothe drawing below.Forexample,when the machine isin“Mode 0”

the keypad’sbitcontrolmapsto outputsY0through Y7.During “Mode 1”the keypad

controlsY10 through Y17. Inthisway,eightkeys aremultiplexed among sixteen

outputpoints.

Mode 0

Y10

Y11

Y17

Mode 1

Outputs,

Y0-- Y7

Outputs,

Y10 -- Y17

NOTE:The operator mustbe informed astowhichmode isactive before and during

keypad useforbitcontrol. One method isto useladderlogictosend a message to

the DV--1000 displayindicating which outputsare underbitcontrol.

Inthisexample,wewill usethe state ofdiscreteinputX0toindicatethe mode of the

machine.X0=OFF isMode 0,and X0=ON isMode 1.The ladderlogicprogramon

the following page mapsthe bitcontrolkeys tocontrolrelay contactsC0through C7

(see setup rung).The main programthen usesX0inconjunction withthe control

relays tocontroleitherthe firstorsecond bankofYoutputpoints.

Load the example programinthe CPUand placethe CPU inRun Mode.You can use

StatusDisplayMode tosee the programwork.Press the StatusKeyfollowed bythe

Plus(+)Keytoviewthe statusofYoutputpoints.Then placethe keypad inBit

ControlMode bypressing the OptionsKeyand selecting BitControlfromthe menu.

When the statusdisplayreturns,you can change between Mode 0 and Mode 1 using

a discreteinputatX0.Then observethe corresponding group ofYoutputs.

PRESS

7654321076543210

Y 0 0

Y 1 0

Y 2 0

Y 3 0

Mode 0

(X0=OFF)

Mode 1

(X0=ON)

MultiplexedBit

Control

Mode

BitControlMode

Setup ParametersforBitControl

LDA

O40600

OUT

V7625

OUT

V7626

Load the octaladdress forV40600 intothe

accumulator.C0through C17 mapstoV40600.

Output the address intoV7625, the location of the bit

controlregister.The bitcontrolkeys controlC0toC7.

Outputourpowerup defaultcode toV7626, the

location of the powerup defaultsetup parameter.

SP0

Firstscan only

Load the constantK3intothe accumulator.K3isthe

code forthe powerup defaultmode StatusDisplay

Mode.

OUTWhen X0isOFF, the machine isinMode 0. Inthis

mode wemap the bitcontrolkeys tocontroloutputsY0

through Y7.Note:If using DL105 be sureCPUis

initialized tomakeX0 operational.

MainProgram

OUT

OUTWhen X0isON, the machine isinMode 1. Inthis

mode wemap the bitcontrolkeys to outputsY10

through Y17.

Y10

OUT

Y11

OUT

Y12

OUT

Y13

OUT

Y14

OUT

Y15

OUT

Y16

OUT

Y17

SAME

a:\bitctrl3.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

The keypad inBitControlMode operatesasmomentary switches,as you mayrecall.

Abitison onlywhen its corresponding keyispressed.Thisexamplefeaturesasmall

programwhichchangesthe momentarynatureinto a latching,ortoggling function.

You can press akeyoncetoturnonabit, then press itagaintoturn off the bit!

RELEASED

Key PRESSED

Toggle

Function OFF

Afterloading the programbelow,placethe DV-1000 inStatusDisplayMode.Then

monitorthe statusofcontrolrelays C00 through C39 as shown below.The keypad is

mapped toC0through C7,and the corresponding toggled bitsarefromC20 toC27.

PRESS

C 0 0

C 1 0

C 2 0

C 3 0

Keypad bits

Toggled bits

2.Release“0”and noticethatC0turnsoff

butC20 stays on.

3.Press “0”againtoturnC20 off.

1.Press “0” (CHG

PRE).Noticethat

C0 and

corresponding bit

C20 bothturn on.

The keypad mustbe inBitControlMode totogglethe bitsas shown above.Press the

OptionsKey,selectBitControl,and the statusdisplaywill return automatically.

Setup ParametersforBitControl

LDA

O40600

OUT

V7625

OUT

V7626

Load the octaladdress forV40600 intothe

accumulator.C0through C17 mapstoV40600.

Output the address intoV7625, the location of the bit

controlregister.The bitcontrolkeys controlC0toC7.

Outputourpowerup defaultcode toV7626, the

location of the powerup defaultsetup parameter.

SP0

Firstscan only

Load the constantK3intothe accumulator.K3isthe

code forthe powerup defaultmode StatusDisplay

Mode.

V40600 K0

C30

ActivatecontrolrelayC30 for1scan when any keyis

pressed on the keypad.

C30

V40601

XOR

V40600

OUT

V40601

Load the contentsofV40601 intothe

accumulator(C20 toC37).Thisisused asthe toggle

image registerinthisprogram.

The XORresultsareinthe accumulator,and itisthe

newtoggle bitimage.Output thistoV40601,

replacing the oldtoggleimage.

Do an exclusiveORfunction on the accumulator

contentsand the keypad image atV40600.This

effectivelydoesthe toggleinversion foreach bit.

MainProgram

BitControl

ToggleFunction

a:\bitctrl4.prj

Mode

BitControlMode

ChapterSummary

Now we havecovered BitControlMode and demonstrated howtoturn on specific

I/O bitsusing the keypad.

Wemay summarizesome of the keypointswe havelearned aboutBitControlMode

inthis chapter:

SBitControlMode onlyappliestothe keypad.The display can be in any

one of the otherthree modesduring BitControl.

SThe keypad operatesasnormallyopen,momentary switchesduring bit

control.

SOnlythe lowereightbitsofV-memorylocationsmaybe directly

addressed bybitcontrol.

SAfterselectingaV-memorylocation forbitcontrol,do notuseitsupper

eightbits(the DV-1000 overwritesthesewhile updating the whole

V-memoryword).

SIf ladderlogic containsan outputpoint thatreferencesthe same address

asthe bitcontrolled register,aconflictexists.The PLCscan will

overwritethe keypad request.

Nowyou havethe necessaryinformation toinstall and useyourDV-1000!

Summaryof

Key Points

Troubleshooting

Guide

In ThisAppendix....

—TroubleshootingGuide

Troubleshooting Guide

Oneor more exampleprogramsinthismanualdo notoperateproperly.What’swrong?

Check forthe following possiblecauses:

SMostof the example programsinclude firstscan rungsusing SP0

contacts.The CPUneedstomakeaprogram-to-run mode transition in

orderfortheserungsto execute.UseDirectSOFT todothis.

SThe program mayrequire an external inputsuch asX0 orX1.Check the

systemconfiguration requirementslisted forthe exampletowork.

SThe DL430 CPUdoesnotsupportsomeinstructions such asMOVMC

and ACONboxeswhich occurinthe examples.The DL130 and DL230

do notsupportpointervariables(type P).

When pressing someof the keys on theDV-1000,adisplay message appearsthatsays “Setup

Error,Check ValueinV(xxxx)”.HowcanIeliminatethese error messages?

For mostof the DV-1000 modes, two orthree PLCV-memorylocationsmustbe

loaded withsetup parameters.The range ofV-memory setaside forthispurposeis

described inChapter3. If you havemanuallyentered these parametersatone time,

theynowmayhave becomecorrupted forone ofseveralpossiblereasons.We

recommend imbedding parametersetup datainladderlogic(firstscan rung only).

See Chapter3for moreonthistopic.

Using ChangePreset ModeIattempt tochangetimerorcounterpresets.However,thetimeror

counterpresetdoes notactually changewhenthePLCprogramisrunning.What’swrong?

The mostlikelyproblemisthat the counterortimerboxinthe ladderprogramhasa

constantKxxxx selected asa preset. You will need to edit the timerorcounterboxto

instead referenceaV-memorylocation forthe preset. The Change Preset function

cannotchange an instruction box’s constant. Pleasesee the examplesinChapter6.

Ican’tget thenumericdatainMessageDisplay modeto putnumberson the screen.

Potentialsourcesof thisproblemare:

SThe numeric setup parameteratV7623 maynotbe pointing tothe area

ofV-memorywherethe value resides.

SThe textdatamaybe masking the number(s)ifitsASCII codesare 20

hexorgreaterintextpositions corresponding to numericpositions

whereyou want the numbersto appear.

SThe displayisnotinMessage DisplayMode.

Whydoes ChangePresetkeypadentries take solong torespond and updatethedisplay?

The delay you areseeing isdue tocommunication time between the DV-1000 and

the CPU.Ifscreen updateslag behind,itcan causeyou to overshoot the desired

value.Forbestresults,pauseasecond between key strokes.

InladderlogicIchangethetextornumericpointerto point toa second block ofdata.However,

theDV-1000 onlyreadstheoriginaldatablock.Whyisthat?

The DV-1000 onlyreadsthe setup parametertablejustafterpowerup. If you want to

change the displaydata,you’ll need tomove newdataintothe originaltextand/or

numericdata blocks.An exampleinChapter4showsthe ladderlogicrequired to do this.

Troubleshooting Guide

Iamnotabletochangepresetvalues,eventhough Ihave enteredthe correctpassword(orthe

passwordisdisabled).What’swrong?

See if the number(s)you aretrying to editare hexnumbers.Remember,Change

PresetMode onlyworks forBCD numbers(0000 to 9999).Also,makesurethe

switchonthe frontofyourCPU isnotinthe “Run”position (use“Term”).

TheACON(ASCII Constant) instruction boxwill only accept twocharacters, whilethe examples

inthemanualshowmanymore characters.What’stheproblem?

You are probablyusingaHand-heldProgrammerto enterladderlogic.Thisisok,but

the extended ACONboxfunctionality you are expecting isprovided bythe PC-based

DirectSOFT programming software.The Hand-heldProgrammeraccessesthe

CPU’s standardACONboxfunction,which acceptstwocharacters.Thisis

described inChapter4.

The keypadseemsto belocked up.WhenIpress keys thedisplay does notchange.Whyisthat?

Therecan be two differentcausesof thisproblem:

SIt maybe that the DV-1000 isinBitControlMode.Thistemporarily

changesthe keypad functionality.Press the ClearKeyfollowed bythe

EnterKeyto exitBitControlMode.

SThe DV-1000 setup parametersmaybe invalid, thereby confusing

DV-1000 firmware.ThisismostlikelyifyourCPU isnewand its setup

parameterlocationsforthe DV-1000 have neverbeen programmed.

Followthe instructionsinChapter2toinitializethe CPUscratchpad

memory,which places zerosin all thesesetup parameterlocations.

WhenIuseaLDD instruction toloadtextdata(ASCII codes),thedisplay outputswapsthe

position of thetwo pairsofcharacters.Why?

Thisisnormal.The reason behind thiseffect, along with an example,is showninthe

section inChapter4, titled “Loading TextUsing the LDD and OUTDInstructions”.

Thedisplay backlightison,butno characters everappearon thedisplay foranyof themodes.

This condition occurswhen the DV-1000 is connected tothe second

communicationsportonaDL240 thatis configured incorrectly.Using DirectSOFT,

select the PLCmenu, then Setup, then SecondaryPort.Set the port for9600 baud,

8 data bits,1stop bit, odd parity.

WhenIviewthe contentsof the setup parameterlocations,the setup pointervalues arewrong. It

seems something isoverwriting the setup datawhichtheladderprogramwrites on thefirstscan.

Rememberthat the LDAinstruction whichloadsoctaladdressesinthe setup

programconvertsthe octalnumbersto hexnumbers. It’slikelythat the values you

see arethe correcthexrepresentationsof the octaladdresses.

WhentheDV-1000 powersup,theonlything itdoes isdisplay the error message“E320 TIME

OUT”.The keypadalso does notwork.Whatistheproblem?

The message you see isgenerated bythe DV-1000. It isunableto establish

communicationswiththe CPU.Check the following tofind the source of the problem:

SThe communications cablemaybe faulty. Inspect the contactsfordust,

etc., orchange cables.

SIf you havemade a customcable,itmaybe that the cable pinoutsare

reversed (the RJ12 connectoron one end isinstalled upside down).Pin

1 ofone end shouldconnect to pin6of the opposite end!Refertothe

customcable drawing inChapter2.

Reference Data

In ThisAppendix....

—Setup ParameterTables

—ASCII Table

ReferenceData

Setup ParameterTables

The following tableincludesall the setup parametersforthe variousmodesof the

DV-1000.

PLC CPU

V-memory

Locations

DV-1000 ParameterDescription Operational

Mode

See Chapter

Number

V7620 Change PresetValuesPointerCHGPRE6

V7621 Change PresetTitlesPointerCHGPRE6

V7622 Change PresetBlock SizeCHGPRE6

V7623 NumericMessage PointerMSG4

V7624 TextMessagesPointerMSG4

V7625 BitControlPointerBITCNTRL 7

V7626 Powerup OperationalMode Power-up

Default3

V7627 Change PresetValue PasswordCHGPRE6

V7720*Titled TimerPresetValue PointerCHGPRE6

V7721*Titled CounterPresetValue PointerCHGPRE6

V7722*,

High byte

Titled TimerPresetBlock SizeCHGPRE6

LowbyteTitled CounterPresetBlock SizeCHGPRE6

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722.

The next tablerepeatsthe setup parameterlist, butgivesthe valid address range for

eachCPUtype and the datatype foreachsetup parameter.

ReferenceData

PLC CPU

V-memory

Locations

DV-1000

Parameter

Description

Data

Type

DL130

DL230

Ranges

DL240,

Ranges

DL250

DL350

DL430

Ranges

DL440

Ranges

DL450

Ranges

V7620 Change

Preset

Values

Pointer

OctalV2000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377 V1400 to

V7377 V1400 to

V7377,

V10000 -

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000 -

V37777

V7621 Change

Preset

Titles

Pointer

OctalV2000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377 V1400 to

V7377 V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7622 Change

Preset

Block Size

BCD 1-- 16 1 -- 16 1 -- 32 1 -- 32 1 -- 32

V7623 Numeric

Message

Pointer

OctalV2000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377 V1400 to

V7377 V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7624 Text

Message

Pointer

OctalV0000 to

V2377,

V4000 to

V4177

V2000 to

V4377 V1400 to

V7377 V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7625 BitControl

PointerOctalX,Y,or

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,or

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,GX,

orC

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,GX,

orC

V--mem.

locations

X,Y,GX,

orC

V--mem.

locations

V7626 Power-up

Operational

Mode

BCD 0,1,2,

12,30,1,2,

12,3

V7627 Change

Preset

Value

Password

BCD 0000 to

9999 0000 to

9999

V7720*Titled Timer

Preset

Value

Pointer

Octal-- V2000 to

V4377 V1400 to

V7377 V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7721*Titled

Counter

PresetValue

Pointer

Octal-- V2000 to

V4377 V1400 to

V7377 V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V17777

V1400 to

V7377,

V10000-

V37777

V7722*,

High byteTitled Timer

Preset

Block Size

BCD -- 1to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99

V7722*,

LowbyteTitled

Counter

PresetBlock

Size

BCD -- 1to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsusememorylocationsV7640 thruV7642 here.

ReferenceData

ASCII Table

There areseveralversionsof the ASCII charactercodesforvarious computerplatformsand output

devices.The following tableliststhe ASCII characters supported bythe DirectVIEWä1000.

HEX ASCII HEX ASCII HEX ASCII HEX ASCII HEX ASCII HEX ASCII HEX ASCII HEX ASCII

00 ---- 20 40 @60 ‘80 ---- A0---- C0---- E0a

01 ---- 21 !41 A61 a81 ---- A1hC1---- E1ä

02 ---- 22 ”42 B62 b82 ---- A2?C2---- E2ß

03 ---- 23 #43 C63 c83 ---- A3?C3---- E3e

04 ---- 24 $44 D64 d84 ---- A4\C4---- E4µ

05 ---- 25 %45 E65 e85 ---- A5gC5---- E5s

06 ---- 26 &46 F66 f86 ---- A6---- C6---- E6?

07 ---- 27 ’47 G67 g87 ---- A7---- C7---- E7q

08 ---- 28 (48 H68 h88 ---- A8---- C8---- E8----

09 ---- 29 )49 I69 i89 ---- A9---- C9---- E9----

0A---- 2a *4AJ6Aj8A---- AA ---- CA ---- EA?

0B---- 2B+4BK6Bk8B---- AB ---- CB ---- EB´

0C---- 2C,4CL6Cl8C---- AC ---- CC ---- EC----

0D---- 2D-- 4DM6Dm8D---- AD ---- CD ---- ED----

0E---- 2E.4EN6En8E---- AE---- CE---- EE n

0F---- 2F/4FO6Fo8F---- AF---- CF---- EFö

10 ---- 30 050 P70 p90 ---- B0—D0---- F0p

11 ---- 31 151 Q71 q91 ---- B1---- D1---- F1q

12 ---- 32 252 R72 r92 ---- B2---- D2---- F2?

13 ---- 33 353 S73 s93 ---- B3---- D3---- F38

14 ---- 34 454 T74 t94 ---- B4ID4---- F4O

15 ---- 35 555 U75 u95 ---- B5---- D5---- F5ü

16 ---- 36 656 V76 v96 ---- B6---- D6---- F6S

17 ---- 37 757 W77 w97 ---- B7---- D7---- F7?

18 ---- 38 858 X78 x98 ---- B8---- D8---- F8x

19 ---- 39 959 Y79 y99 ---- B9---- D9---- F9u

1A---- 3A:5AZ7Az9A---- BA ?DA ---- FA----

1B---- 3B;5B[7B{9B---- BB ---- DB jFB----

1C---- 3C<5C---- 7C|9C---- BC ---- DC ---- FC----

1D---- 3D=5D]7D}9D---- BD ---- DD ---- FD÷

1E---- 3E>5E^7E?9E---- BE---- DE---- FE----

1F---- 3F?5F_7F?9F---- BF---- DFhFF J

NOTE:If anyof the non-useablecharactersnoted as---- are used forthe messagesortitlesinthe DV--1000,

the characterwill notdisplay.

DV-1000

Worksheets

In ThisAppendix....

—MessageDisplayWorksheets

—ChangePresetWorksheets

DV-1000 Worksheets

MessageDisplay Worksheets

The Fault Instruction can outputup to23characters.Werecommend limiting it to 15

characters sothe text fitswithinthe DV-1000’stop line.The following worksheet

showsladderprogramsegments. Onthe left arethe Faultboxes(yoursmaybe

spread throughoutyourprogram,and use differentpermissivecontact

arrangements). Onthe rightarethe corresponding datalabelsand ACONboxes.

Each activeFaultbox can causethe message inthe corresponding ACONBoxto be

displayed.Rememberthat the maximumnumberofofData Labelsis64,and the

Data Labelnumbersare hexadecimal.

DLBL

ACON

_______________________

FAULT

DLBL

ACON

_______________________

ACON

_______________________

ACON

_______________________

ACON

_______________________

ACON

_______________________

ACON

_______________________

ACON

_______________________

FAULT

Fault Messages

DV-1000 Worksheets

Forcombined numericand textoutput, thisworksheetcan helpyou organizethe

numbersand ASCII codeswiththe proper memorylocations.

7654321076543210

31 33

135

36343230

252321

2 1

13 11

16 14

1517

12 13 14 15

Position Data TextV-Memory

Position NumberV-Memory

Position Data TextV-Memory

NumericDisplay Positions

TextDisplay Positions

NumericData

TextData

16 17

6 7

5 4

7654321076543210

TextData

Address ValueSetup Parameter

V7623 NumericPointer

V7624 TextPointer

MessageDisplay

Output Maps

DV-1000 Worksheets

The following displaygridsareforgeneral-purposemessage displayplanning.

31 33

61 3 5 7

36343230

2321

12 14

Text

Output

3 2 1 0

13 11

6 4

16 14

1517

Numeric

Output

NumericDataStarting Address =V__________

TextDataStarting Address =V__________

31 33

61 3 5 7

36343230

2321

12 14

Text

Output

3 2 1 0

13 11

6 4

16 14

1517

Numeric

Output

NumericDataStarting Address =V__________

TextDataStarting Address =V__________

Display Output

Grids

DV-1000 Worksheets

ChangePresetWorksheet

Choosethe text titlesforthe User-titled presetsand the numberof timerand counter

preset titles.Rememberto use atleastone ofeachtitletype in all cases.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

Timer1Counter1

Password

Enable/Disable

PasswordValuePowerup ModePowerup Value

Usethe worksheetaboveto determine the setup parametervaluesbelow.

V-Memory

Location

Setup ParameterDescription FormatValueNotes:

V7620 UserPresetDataPointerOctalstartingatV...

V7621 UserPresetTitlesPointerOctalstartingatV...

V7622 UserPresetBlockSizeBCD # of titles

V7626 PowerupModeBCD

V7627 ChangePresetPasswordBCD

V7720*TitledTimerDataPointerOctalstartingatV...

V7721*TitledCounterDataPointerOctalstartingatV...

V7722*TimerPresetBlockSize(highbyte)BCD xx timers,

CounterPresetBlockSize(lowbyte)

*DL130 and DL230 CPUsuse differentmemorylocationshere:V7640 instead of

V7720,V7641 instead ofV7721,and V7642 instead ofV7722.

DV-1000 Worksheets

Usethe table belowasacontinuation worksheet.

UserPresetsTimerPresetsCounterPresets

TextTitles Text

Locations

Data

Locations

Titles Data

Locations

Counter

Titles

Data

Locations

Timerand Counterlabelnumbering on the DV-1000 isfrom1to 99,decimal.This

allowsthe machine operatorthe convenience ofusing decimalnumbers.However,

timersand counternumbersinthe CPUsare numbered in octal,starting with 0. If you

decide to associatethe first timerand/orcounterlabelswiththe first timerand

counterboxesinthe CPU, the following table providesthe required conversion.

DOctDOctDOctDOctDOctDOctDOctDOctDOct

1 0 12 13 23 26 34 41 45 54 56 67 67 102 78 115 89 130

2 1 13 14 24 27 35 42 46 55 57 70 68 103 79 116 90 131

3 2 14 15 25 30 36 43 47 56 58 71 69 104 80 117 91 132

4 3 15 16 26 31 37 44 48 57 59 72 70 105 81 120 92 133

5 4 16 17 27 32 38 45 49 60 60 73 71 106 82 121 93 134

6 5 17 20 28 33 39 46 50 61 61 74 72 107 83 122 94 135

7 6 18 21 29 34 40 47 51 62 62 75 73 110 84 123 95 136

8 7 19 22 30 35 41 50 52 63 63 76 74 111 85 124 96 137

9 10 20 23 31 36 42 51 53 64 64 77 75 112 86 125 97 140

10 11 21 24 32 37 43 52 54 65 65 100 76 113 87 126 98 141

11 12 22 25 33 40 44 53 55 66 66 101 77 114 88 127 99 142

Timerand Counter

Numbering

Conversion Chart

Index

ACONInstruction,4--25 to 4--31

ASCII Table,AppendixB

BitControlMode

Debugging applications,1--15,7--9to 7--10

Message display coordination,7--11 to 7--14

Multiplexed bitcontrol,7--15

Overview,7--2to 7--3

Quick Tour,1--13

Setup parameters,7--4

Togglefunction,7--17

Change PresetMode

Accessing presetvariables,6--8

Buffered presetvalues,6--31

Combination titles,6--25 to 6--27

Controlling a process,1--15

Individualdefaultusertitles,6--22 to 6--24

Operator’sGuide,6--32 to 6--33

Overview,6--2to 6--4

Password,6--28 to 6--29

Preset titlelists,6--6to 6--7

Quick Tour,1--12

Setup parameters,6--4to 6--7

Timerand counterpresets,6--10 to 6--12,6--30

Titlesavailable,6--3

User-titled presets,6--14 to 6--24

User-titled text, 6--19 to 6--22

Communication cables,1--5,2--7to 2--8

Display,1--5,1--6to 1--8

Errormessage,4--4to 4--7

Overview,4--2

Example programs.See Programexamples

Faultmessage,4--4to 4--7

Overview,4--2

FrequentlyAsked Questions,1--16 to 1--17

Installation

Mounting Location,2--5

PanelMounting,2--6

PLCSelection,2--4

Keypad,1--5,1--6to 1--8

Bitcontrolfunction,7--3,7--6to 7--7

LDD instruction,Used fortextoutput, 4--17 to 4--18

Message DisplayMode

ACONinstruction,4--25 to 4--31

Bargraphs,4--49 to 4--56

Bitcontrolcoordination,7--11 to 7--14

Blinking text, 4--38 to 4--40

Combining numbersand next, 4--19 to 4--24

Displaypositions,4--18 to 4--19

Dynamictext, 4--36 to 4--37

Embedded time and date,4--44 to 4--48

Howto displaynumbers,4--13 to 4--14

Howto displaytext, 4--15 to 4--16

Howusermessageswork,4--9,4--20

Monitoring a process,1--15

Multiple displays,4--32 to 4--35

Overview,4--2to 4--4

Polarity sign fornumericoutput, 4--41 to 4--43

Quick Tour,1--11

Scrolling display,4--57 to 4--61

Setup parameters,4--10 to 4--12,4--22 to 4--23

System messages,4--5to 4--8

Unmasking numericpositions,4--23

OperatorInterface

Design Basics,1--14 to 1--15

Role ofDV-1000,1--2

Using single ordualDV-1000s,2--2to 2--3

Operator’sGuide toChange PresetMode,6--32 to 6--33

OUTDinstruction,Used fortextoutput, 4--17 to 4--18

Password,6--28 to 6--29

Powerup defaultoperationalmode,3--9to 3--11

Presets.See Change PresetMode

Programexamples

Bargraphs,4--49 to 4--56

Bitcontroltoggle,7--17

Bitcontrolwithmessage display,7--11 to 7--14

Blinking text, 4--38 to 4--40

Diskette,1--5

Dynamictext, 4--36 to 4--37

Embedded decimalpoint, 4--62

Embedded time and date,4--44 to 4--48

Installation,2--9

Loading,2--10

Multiple displays,4--32 to 4--35

Multiplexed bitcontrol,7--15

Polarity sign fornumericoutput, 4--41 to 4--43

Scrolling display,4--57 to 4--61

Systemrequirements,4--4

Timerand counterpresets,6--10 to 6--13

User-titled presets,6--14 to 6--24

Setup parameters

Bitcontrolmode,7--4

Change presetmode,6--4to 6--7

Definitions,3--4to 3--5

General,1--9

Howto enter,3--7

Loading address pointers,3--8

Message displaymode,4--10 to 4--12,4--22 to 4--24

Overview,3--2to 3--3

Powerup defaultmode,3--9to 3--11

Specifications,1--18

StatusDisplayMode

Address selection,5--4

Bookmark,5--6

Datatype selection,5--5

Monitoring a process,1--15

Overview,5--2

Quick Tour,1--10

Timerand counterpresets,6--10 to 6--13,6--30

Appa View / The Manual D24view

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation